Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital on the Internet Digital as an app Familiarize yourself with the con tents of the Operator’s Manual directly via the vehicle’s multi media system (menu item «Vehi cle information»). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.
Here you can find comprehen sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form.
You can find the Operator’s Man ual on the Mercedes-Benz home page.
The Mercedes-Benz Guides app is available free-of-charge in familiar app stores.
2475844206f 2475844206
Apple iOS AndroidTM
Order no. P247 0409 13 Part no. 247 584 42 06 Edition A 2021
GLB Operator’s Manual
Mercedes-BenzMe rce
de s-B
en z
GL B
Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi cles and about MercedesBenz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Documentation team MercedesBenz AG: Not to be reprinted, trans lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from MercedesBenz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer MercedesBenz AG Mercedesstrae 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
Example
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is enabled
If the front passenger airbag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, this can result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child.
Observe the chapter «Children in the vehicle».
As at 23.09.2019
Thank you for purchasing a Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator’s Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera tor’s Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment
R Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator’s Manual R Printed Operator’s Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company
2475844206
2475844206
Symbols ……………………………………………….. 5
At a glance ……………………………………………. 6 Cockpit ………………………………………………….. 6 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) …….. 10 Indicator and warning lamps (Wide screen Cockpit) …………………………………….. 12 Overhead control panel ………………………….. 14 Door control panel and seat adjustment ……. 16 Emergencies and breakdowns …………………. 18
Digital Operator’s Manual ……………………. 20 Calling up the Digital Operator’s Manual …… 20
General notes ……………………………………… 22 Protecting the environment …………………….. 22 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ………………….. 22 Operator’s Manual …………………………………. 23 Service and vehicle operation ………………….. 24 Operating safety ……………………………………. 25 Declaration of conformity for wireless vehicle components ………………………………. 26 Diagnostics connection ………………………….. 27
Qualified specialist workshop ………………….. 27 Correct use of the vehicle ………………………. 28 Sport Utility Vehicle ……………………………….. 28 Notes for persons with electronic medi cal aids ………………………………………………… 28 Problems with your vehicle ……………………… 28 Reporting safety defects …………………………. 29 Limited Warranty …………………………………… 30 QR code for rescue card …………………………. 30 Data storage …………………………………………. 30 Copyright ……………………………………………… 33
Occupant safety ………………………………….. 35 Restraint system ……………………………………. 35 Seat belts …………………………………………….. 37 Airbags …………………………………………………. 41 PRE-SAFE system ………………………………… 48 Automatic measures after an accident ……… 49 Safely transporting children in the vehi cle ………………………………………………………. 50 Notes on pets in the vehicle ……………………. 63
Opening and closing ……………………………. 65 SmartKey ……………………………………………… 65
Doors …………………………………………………… 68 Cargo compartment ………………………………. 72 Side windows ………………………………………… 78 Sliding sunroof ………………………………………. 81 Anti-theft protection ………………………………. 85
Seats and stowing ………………………………. 89 Notes on the correct driver’s seat posi tion ……………………………………………………… 89 Notes on the height limit on the third row of seats ………………………………………….. 90 Seats …………………………………………………… 90 Steering wheel …………………………………….. 101 Easy entry and exit feature ……………………. 102 Operating the memory function ……………… 103 Stowage areas …………………………………….. 104 Sockets ………………………………………………. 120 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .. 122 Installing/removing the floor mats …………. 124
Light and visibility …………………………….. 125 Exterior lighting …………………………………… 125 Interior lighting ……………………………………. 130
2 Contents
Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ……………………………………………….. 131 Mirrors ……………………………………………….. 135
Climate control …………………………………. 139 Overview of climate control systems ………. 139 Operating the climate control system ……… 139
Driving and parking …………………………… 143 Driving ……………………………………………….. 143 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ………………………. 154 Automatic transmission ………………………… 157 Function of the 4MATIC ………………………… 162 Refueling …………………………………………….. 162 Parking ………………………………………………. 164 Driving and driving safety systems ………….. 172 Vehicle towing instructions ……………………. 221
Instrument Display and on-board computer ………………………………………….. 223 Notes on the Instrument Display and on- board computer …………………………………… 223 Instrument Display overview ………………….. 224
Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel …………………………………………………. 225 Operating the on-board computer ………….. 225 Overview of what is shown on the multi function display …………………………………… 227 Head-up Display ………………………………….. 227
MBUX multimedia system …………………. 230 Overview and operation ………………………… 230 System settings …………………………………… 238 Navigation …………………………………………… 241 Telephone …………………………………………… 248 Mercedes me and apps …………………………. 251 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system …… 258 Radio & media …………………………………….. 262 Sound settings ……………………………………. 269
Maintenance and care ……………………….. 270 ASSYST PLUS service interval display …….. 270 Engine compartment ……………………………. 271 Cleaning and care ………………………………… 276
Breakdown assistance ………………………. 284 Emergency ………………………………………….. 284 Flat tire ………………………………………………. 285 Battery (vehicle) ………………………………….. 292 Tow starting or towing away ………………….. 297 Electrical fuses ……………………………………. 301
Wheels and tires ……………………………….. 305 Notes on noise or unusual handling char acteristics …………………………………………… 305 Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires …………………………………………………… 305 Notes on snow chains ………………………….. 306 Tire pressure ………………………………………. 306 Loading the vehicle ………………………………. 313 Tire labeling ………………………………………… 317 Definition of terms for tires and loading ….. 322 Changing a wheel ………………………………… 325 Emergency spare wheel ………………………… 334
Technical data …………………………………… 337 Notes on technical data ………………………… 337 Vehicle electronics ………………………………. 337
Contents 3
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ………………………. 339 Operating fluids …………………………………… 340 Vehicle data ………………………………………… 347
Display messages and warning/indi cator lamps ………………………………………. 350 Display messages ………………………………… 350 Warning and indicator lamps …………………. 398
Index …………………………………………………. 412
4 Contents
In this Operator’s Manual, you will find the fol lowing symbols:
& DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi ronmental notes
Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes.
* NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.
# Observe notes on material damage.
% These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.
# Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display Information on the multifunction dis
play/media display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause
Symbols 5
Left-hand-drive vehicles
6 At a glance Cockpit
1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles 159
2 Combination switch 126
3 Instrument Display 224
4 DIRECT SELECT lever 157
5 Start/stop button 144
ECO start/stop function 153
6 Media display 230
7 Climate control systems 139
8 Hazard warning light system 127
9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 46
A Glove box 107
B Storage compartment 107
C Cup holder
D Controller for volume and switching sound on/off
230
Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off
230
E Calls up navigation 232
F Calls up radio or media 232
G Calls up the telephone 232
H Calls up favorites 232
I Calls up vehicle functions 232
J Active Parking Assist 209
K DYNAMIC SELECT switch 155
L Touchpad 232
M Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem
225
N Adjusts the steering wheel 101
O Switches the steering wheel heater on/off 101
P Control panel:
On-board computer 225
Cruise control 182
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 187
Q Diagnostics connection 27
At a glance Cockpit 7
R Opens the hood 271
S Electric parking brake 168
T Light switch 125
8 At a glance Cockpit
Instrument Display (standard)
10 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)
1 ! ABS 407
2 #! Turn signal lights 126
3 h Tire pressure monitor 410
4 # Electrical malfunction 402
5L Distance warning 407
6 Brakes (red) 405
$ USA only
J Canada only
7 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 405
8 Electric parking brake (red) 405
F USA only
! Canada only
9 ; Check Engine 402
A N Front fog lamps 125
B R Rear fog lamp 126
C K High beam 126
L Low beam 125
T Parking lamps 125
D ESP OFF 407
ESP 407
E 6 Restraint system 400
F Fuel level 224
G Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator
402
H Electric power steering 401
I Seat belt 400
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 11
Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display
12 At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit)
1 #! Turn signal lights 126
2 6 Restraint system 400
3 ESP OFF 407
ESP 407
4 R Rear fog lamp 126
5 K High beam 126
L Low beam 125
T Parking lamps 125
6 N Front fog lamps 125
7 Coolant temperature 402
8 Coolant temperature display 224
9 ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 405
A # Electrical malfunction 402
BL Distance warning 407
C ! ABS 407
D Electric power steering 401
E h Tire pressure monitor 410
F Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator
402
G Fuel level 224
H Electric parking brake (red) 405
F USA only
! Canada only
I Brakes (red) 405
$ USA only
J Canada only
J Seat belt 400
K ; Check Engine 402
L Indicator lamp inoperative
At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (Widescreen Cockpit) 13
14 At a glance Overhead control panel
1 Sun visors
2 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off
130
3 | Switches automatic interior lighting con trol on/off
130
4 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off
130
5 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off
130
6 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off
130
7; me button 253
8 G SOS button 253
9 3 Opens closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
81
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 81
A Inside rearview mirror 136
At a glance Overhead control panel 15
16 At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment
1 Operates the memory function 103
2 Adjusts the seats electrically 93
3 Switches the seat heating on/off 99
4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off 100
5 W Opens/closes the rear left side window 78
6 W Opens/closes the left side window 78
7 Operates the outside mirrors 135
8 Opens/closes the tailgate 72
9 W Opens/closes the right side window 78
A W Opens/closes the rear right side win dow
78
B Child safety lock for the rear side windows 63
C Opens the door 68
D Locks/unlocks the vehicle 69
E Adjusts the head restraints 97
F Configures the seat settings 99
G Adjusts the seat backrest inclination 92
H Adjusts the seat height 92
I Adjusts the seat cushion inclination 92
J Sets the seat fore-and-aft position 92
K Adjusts the seat cushion length 92
At a glance Door control panel and seat adjustment 17
18 At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns
1 Safety vests 284
2 me button and SOS button 253
3 Hazard warning light system 127
4 Starting assistance 295
5 Checking and refilling operating fluids 340
6 Tow-starting and towing away 298
7 Flat tire 285
8 QR code for accessing the rescue card 30
9 Tow-starting and towing away 298
A TIREFIT kit 287
B First-aid kit (soft sided) 285
C Warning triangle 284
D Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing the rescue card
162
At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 19
Calling up the Digital Operator’s Manual Multimedia system: 4 5 Info 5 Operator’s Manual 5
The Digital Operator’s Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Operator’s Manual: R Search: search for keywords in order to find
quick answers to questions about the opera tion of the vehicle.
R Quick start: find the first steps towards set ting up your vehicle. R Tips: find information that prepares you for
certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle
functions. R Messages: receive additional information
about the messages in the instrument dis play. R Bookmarks: gain access to your personally
saved bookmarks. R Language: select the language for the Digital
Operator’s Manual.
1 Back 2 Adds bookmarks 3 Picture 4 Contents section 5 Directions of movement of contents section 6 Menu
Some sections in the Digital Operator’s Manual, e.g. warning notes, can be expanded and col lapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator’s Manual: Direct access: open the required content in the Digital Operator’s Manual by pressing and hold
20 Digital Operator’s Manual
ing an entry on the tab bar in the multimedia system:
Instrument Display: call up brief information as display messages in the instrument cluster Voice Control System: call up via the voice control system For safety reasons, the Digital Operator’s Man ual is deactivated while driving.
Digital Operator’s Manual 21
Protecting the environment
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi ronment. Please observe the following rec ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor
rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them).
# Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib ute to environmental protection.
# Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to of its maximum engine speed.
# Switch off the engine in stationary traf fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
# Drive fuel-efficiently. Observe the ECO display for a fuel-efficient driving style.
Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components
Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled recondi tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Recycled reconditioned components
and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.
22 General notes
* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding
Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame
# Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
# Do not carry out repairs or welding.
# Have aftermarket installation of acces sories carried out at a qualified special ist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts should be used. More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 339) when ordering Mercedes- Benz GenuineParts.
Operator’s Manual This Operator’s Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for your vehicle at the time of this Operator’s Man ual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
General notes 23
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada
When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not
be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi
cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R The fuel may have an extremely low octane
number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author ized MercedesBenz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Maintenance
Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the «Roadside Assistance» section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu ment wallet.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send us the «Notification of address change» in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi cle, please send us the «Notice of Purchase of Used Car» in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
24 General notes
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Possible danger due to substances hazard ous to health
In compliance with Proposition 65 («Prop65»), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:
Operating safety
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mal functions or system failures
To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and
maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe cialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts
Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec
tronic component parts or their soft ware.
# You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the «On-board electronics» section in «Technical data».
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under side.
# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
General notes 25
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle
In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an
obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or
chassis components
In situations such as this, the body, the underbody, chassis components, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may not absorb the loads that arise as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts on the exhaust system.
# Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or # If driving safety is impaired while con
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi cle components USA: «Radio based devices of this vehicle com ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.»
Canada: «This vehicle contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno vation, Science and Economic Development Can adas RSS(s). Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.» USA: «Wireless charging system for mobile devi ces (model: WMI2 Wireless Mobile Interface): This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules.» The name and address of the responsible party is: peiker acustic GmbH Max-Planck-Str. 28-32 61381 Friedrichsdorf Germany
26 General notes
Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali fied specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to con necting devices to the diagnostics con nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # Only connect the vehicle diagnostics
connection to devices which have been tested with regard to their suitability and are considered safe.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver’s footwell
Objects in the driver’s footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
# Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver’s footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
* NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection
Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. # If the charge level is low, charge the
battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor rectly carry out the work required on your vehi cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen ter: R safety-relevant works R service and maintenance work R repair work R modifications as well as installations and
conversions R work on electronic components
MercedesBenz recommends a MercedesBenz service center.
General notes 27
Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R the safety notes in this manual R technical data for the vehicle R traffic rules and regulations R laws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Sport Utility Vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident when the center of gravity is too high
The vehicle may start to skid and rollover in the event of sudden steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle’s speed is not adap ted to the road conditions. # Always adapt your speed and driving
style to the vehicle’s driving character
istics and to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles. If this type of vehicle is not driven safely, an acci dent can occur, the vehicle can roll over and occupants can suffer serious or even fatal inju ries. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi cantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. You and all vehicle occupants should always wear your seat belts.
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.
For this reason, the following can occur in isola ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac turer of the aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and your doctor. Mercedes- Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems if there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of aids malfunction ing. Have repairs and maintenance work in the area of vehicle components carrying live voltage and transmission antenna carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis
28 General notes
faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec essary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
«National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966». If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov
Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans port Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes- Benz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll- free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels
General notes 29
Limited Warranty
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc tions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat
ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi cle damage.
QR code for rescue card The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con tains the most important information about your
vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage Electronic control units
Electronic control units are installed in your vehi cle. Some of these are necessary for the safe operation of your vehicle, while some assist you when driving (driver assistance systems). In addition, your vehicle provides comfort and entertainment functions, which are also made possible by electronic control units. Electronic control units contain data memories which can temporarily or permanently store technical information about the vehicle’s operat ing state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunc tions.
In general, this information documents the state of a component part, a module, a system or the surroundings such as: R Operating status of system components (e.g.
fill levels, battery status, tire pressure) R Status messages concerning the vehicle or
its individual components (e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, longitudinal accel eration, lateral acceleration, display of fas tened seat belts) R Malfunctions or faults in important system
components (e.g. lights, brakes) R Information on events leading to vehicle
damage R System reactions in special driving situations
(e.g. airbag deployment, intervention of sta bility control systems) R Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain
sensor)
In addition to providing the actual control unit function, this data assists the manufacturer in detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this
30 General notes
data is temporary and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is stored in the event or fault memory. When your vehicle is serviced, technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service net work employees (e.g. workshops, manufactur ers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Services include, for example, repair services, maintenance processes, warranty claims and quality assurance measures. The read out is per formed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The respective service network locations or third parties collect, process and use the data. They document technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in finding faults and improving quality and are transmitted to the manufacturer, if neces sary. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet as part of repair or maintenance work.
Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle convenience and info tainment functions yourself. This includes, for example: R Multimedia data such as music, films or pho
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an inte grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services
This data can be saved locally in the vehicle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player). If this data is stored in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. This data is sent to third parties only at your request, par ticularly when you use online services in accord ance with the settings that you have selected. You can store or change convenience settings/ individualization in the vehicle at any time.
Depending on the equipment, this includes, for example: R Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi
tions R Suspension and climate control settings R Customizations such as interior lighting
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can control this by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Cer tain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type of integration, this can include: R General vehicle data R Position data
This allows you to use selected apps on your smartphone, such as navigation or music play back. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehi cle data is not directly accessible. Which type of
General notes 31
further data processing occurs is determined by the provider of the specific app used. Which set tings you can make, if any, depends on the spe cific app and the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire less network connection is enabled via the vehi cle’s transmission and reception unit or via con nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online serv ices and applications/apps provided by the man ufacturer or other providers.
Manufacturer’s services Regarding online services of the manufacturer, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Operator’s Manual, website of the manufacturer) along with the relevant data protection information. Per
sonal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. the manufacturer’s designated IT systems. Personal data is collected, pro cessed and used via the provision of services exclusively on the basis of legal permissions or with prior consent. The services and functions (sometimes subject to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. In some cases, this also applies to the entire vehicle’s data connection. This excludes, in par ticular, legally prescribed functions and services.
Third party services If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider’s data protection conditions and terms of use. The manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, please ask the service provider for information about the type, extent and pur pose of the collection and use of personal data when services are provided by third parties.
MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect
If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi media system or Mercedes me connect, addi tional data about the vehicle’s operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con nect. For additional information, please refer to the «MBUX multimedia system» section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
32 General notes
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were
operating R Whether or not the driver and front
passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal and R How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC («MBUSA») expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Copyright Free and open source software
Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
General notes 33
Registered trademarks
R Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue tooth SIG, Inc. R DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. R Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories. R BabySmart, ESP and PRE-SAFE are reg
istered trademarks of Mercedes-Benz AG. R HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen
tex Corporation. R iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc. R Burmester is a registered trademark of
Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microsoft and Windows Media are regis
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq
uity Digital Corporation.
R Gracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. R ZAGATSurvey and related brands are regis
tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
34 General notes
Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system
The restraint system includes the following com ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems
The restraint system can help prevent the vehi cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident.
In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos
sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m)
tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
However, no system available today can com pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Reduced restraint system protection
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint
system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any
electronic component parts or their software.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system functionality
When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys
Occupant safety 35
tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.
Malfunctioning restraint system
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
does not light up when the ignition is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualified spe cialist workshop.
Function of the restraint system in an acci dent
How the restraint system works is determined by the severity of the impact detected and the type of accident anticipated: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover
The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre- emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a deci sive role in the deployment of an airbag. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal
impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver’s airbag, front passenger airbag: fron
tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover,
frontal impact
The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat
36 Occupant safety
is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 46).
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear
ing.
R In general, the powder released is not haz ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo rate, for example.
Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu
pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.
Always observe the instructions about the cor rect driver’s seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 89). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro vide the intended level of protection, each vehi cle occupant must observe the following infor mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must
fit tightly and snugly across the body.
Occupant safety 37
R The seat belt must be routed across the cen ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible
across your hips and pull tight with the shoul der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin
ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R Only one person should use each seat belt at
any one time. Never allow babies and chil dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle’s occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when
securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 104). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 55). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on «Children in the vehicle» (/ page 51).
Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com
mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.
38 Occupant safety
# Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys tem.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi
fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty R Modifications have been made to the
Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended.
# Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho rages or seat belt retractors.
# Make sure that the seat belts are not damaged, are not worn and are clean.
# Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten sioning Devices
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera tional and are unable to perform their inten ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. # Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Fastening seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can not be pulled out any further.
Occupant safety 39
# Always engage seat belt tongue2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle1 of the cor responding seat.
Vehicles with automatic front passenger air bag shutoff:
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device and the side air bag may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff:
* NOTE Deployment of the Emergency Tensioning Device when the front- passenger seat is unoccupied
If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the unoccupied front- passenger seat, the Emergency Tensioning Device may also deploy in the event of an accident along with other systems.
# Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: If the front seat belt is not pulled tightly across your body, the seat belt adjustment may automatically apply a cer tain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys tem (/ page 41).
Releasing seat belts
# Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.
40 Occupant safety
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Belt Adjustment.
Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger
The seat belt warning lamp in the instru ment display is a reminder that all vehicle occu pants must wear their seat belts correctly. The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver’s and front passenger’s doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) and the driver’s or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
Airbags Overview of airbags
1 Knee airbag 2 Driver’s airbag
3 Front passenger airbag 4 Window curtain airbag 5 Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver’s airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage and pelvis
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is enabled
If the front passenger airbag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger airbag during an accident.
Occupant safety 41
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG in front of it, this can result in DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 60). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat.
Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 46).
* NOTE Important points to remember if the front passenger seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the
seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
# Stow objects in a suitable place. # Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Protection provided by the airbags
Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection provided by a correctly fastened seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep
as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information.
# Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant.
42 Occupant safety
To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly; the driver’s seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa tion on the correct driver’s seat position (/ page 89). R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. R Always lean against the seat backrest when
the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not
put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy ment area of the airbag. R If children are traveling in the vehicle,
observe the additional notes (/ page 51).
R Always stow and secure objects correctly.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile
navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side wall trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer’s installation
instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.
Limited protection provided by airbags
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and
do not affix objects to it.
The installation location of an airbag is identified by the airbag symbol (/ page 41).
Occupant safety 43
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers
Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten ded. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that
have been approved for the correspond ing seats by Mercedes-Benz.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
# Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro tection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified
specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
Status of the front passenger front airbag
Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always make sure of the following: R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi
tioned correctly (/ page 50). R Always comply with the child restraint sys
tem manufacturer’s installation instructions. R Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
behind the child restraint system. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust
ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. R The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. R The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be put under strain by the head restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina tion and the head restraint setting accord ingly.
44 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system
Objects between the sitting surface and the child restraint system could affect the func tion of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. # Do not place any objects between the
sitting surface and the child restraint system.
# The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
# The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi ble, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer’s installation instructions.
A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 37). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with
their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos
sible.
The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the sitting sur face.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly.
# Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.
Occupant safety 45
Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 46).
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica tor lamps
Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the ignition is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may
deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after approx imately 60 seconds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger
airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa
bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con tinuously.
46 Occupant safety
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 60). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do
not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forward- facing child restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with parts of the vehi
cle’s interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
# Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
# Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer’s installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe cific information (/ page 60). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con tinuously or be off, depending on the person’s stature.
Occupant safety 47
A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person with a stature correspond ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person with a build corresponding to that of an adult should not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. R If the front passenger seat is occupied by a
person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp either lights up continuously or remains off, depending on the classifica tion. — If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per son of smaller stature should use a rear seat.
— If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the
front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor
rectly fastened seat belt.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Securing the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat (/ page 60)
PRE-SAFE system PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protec tion)
PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver’s seat
and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Close the
sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: Move the
front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position.
48 Occupant safety
R PRE-SAFE Sound: provided that the multi media system is switched on, generates a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro tective mechanism of a person’s hearing.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat posi tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver’s seat
and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle
is stationary. This brake application is can celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol lowing situations: R when backing up
The system will not initiate any braking applica tion in the following situations: R whilst driving
or R when entering or exiting a parking space
while using Active Parking Assist
Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci dent, and depending on the vehicle’s equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 259) R Switching off the engine
To restart the vehicle, switch the ignition off and switch it back on (/ page 144). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be started.
Occupant safety 49
R Switching off the fuel supply R Unlocking the vehicle doors R Lowering the side windows R Displaying the emergency guide in the multi
media system display R Switching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the post- collision brake can minimize the severity of a fur ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak ing the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic brak
ing R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force
Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle
% Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 51).
Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing the child in the child restraint system may have seri ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than twelve years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal ling a child restraint system.
Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator’s Manual. A child restraint sys tem is, for example: R a baby car seat R a rearward-facing child seat R a forward-facing child seat R a child booster seat with a backrest and seat
belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest.
The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
50 Occupant safety
Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Observe standards for child restraint sys tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Detecting risks, avoiding danger
Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets R the vehicle’s seat belt system R the Top Tether anchorages
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys tem (/ page 55). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a
height where a three-point seat belt can be fas tened properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.
Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
Occupant safety 51
Always secure a child restraint system cor rectly
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system
The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur
er’s installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
# Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.
# Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys tem.
# Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
# Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems
correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer’s installation instructions.
R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer’s installation and operating instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: — Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on the rear seat (/ page 55).
— Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 59).
— Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 61). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 60). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur rent situation (/ page 46).
R Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. R Also secure Top Tether if present.
Do not alter the child restraint system
& WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi cations to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system.
52 Occupant safety
# Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system’s manufacturer.
Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition
& WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child
restraint systems that have been dam aged or involved in an accident.
# Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
& WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child
restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
# Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
# If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Occupant safety 53
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people particularly children are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone particularly chil
dren unattended in the vehicle. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat
tended.
Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system
Left/right rear seat Second row of seats, preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 58)
Third row of seats, preferred securing system: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 58)
Left/right rear seat (second and third seat row) alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt
Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied,
ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 46). R Observe the notes on automatic front
passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 44)
Center rear seat Center rear seat (second seat row) securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 58)
54 Occupant safety
Activating or deactivating the child seat safety feature of the seat belt
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion
If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the child safety lock is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is retracted slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately fastened again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord
ance with the traffic conditions. # Activate the special seat belt retractor
again and correctly secure the child restraint system.
When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
# To install a child restraint system: when installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer’s installation and operating instructions as well as the informa tion in this Operator’s Manual.
# Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.
# Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle.
# To activate the child seat safety feature: pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the child seat safety feature is activa ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound.
# Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.
# To deactivate the child seat safety fea ture: press the release button of the seat belt buckle.
# Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet.
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo
compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.
Occupant safety 55
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
Ensure that the rear seat backrest is engaged. To do so, pull forcefully on the seat backrest.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is exceeded
Too much load may be placed on the LATCH- type (ISOFIX) child seat securing systems and the child may not be restrained in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys
tem together weigh more than the per missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg), use only a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system that secures the child with the vehicle seat belt.
# Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available.
Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer’s installation and operat
ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system.
O Always comply with the manufacturer’s installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O Make sure that the child’s feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the follow ing: O When using a Group 0/0+ baby car seat
and a Group I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a Group I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi ble. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi ately and adjust all head restraints cor rectly.
O When using a child restraint system on a seat on the third row of seats: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system and move the seat backrest of the front seat into an upright position if necessary.
56 Occupant safety
O For certain child restraint systems in weight group II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possi ble contact with the roof.
O The child restraint system must not be installed between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly.
# Before every journey, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is correctly engaged in both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system
# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap ped.
Rear bench seat (second row of seats):
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets1.
Vehicles with a third row of seats:
# Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets1.
Occupant safety 57
Securing a Top Tether
& WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after installing Top Tether belts
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when driving. In this case, child restraint systems may no longer perform their intended protective function. Additional injuries may also be caused. # Always lock rear seat backrests after
installing Top Tether belts. # Pay attention to the lock verification
indicator.
Ensure that the rear seat backrest is engaged. To do so, pull forcefully on the seat backrest. If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury can be reduced by a Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child
restraint system attached with LATCH- type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle.
The Top Tether anchorages for the second row of seats are located on the back of the seat back rest. For the third row of seats, use the Top Tether anchorage on the back of the seat back rest.
Second row of seats
# If necessary, slide head restraint1 upwards (/ page 98).
# Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer’s instal lation instructions.
# Guide Top Tether belt4 under head restraint1 between the two head restraint bars.
# Hook Top Tether hook3 into Top Tether anchorage2 without twisting.
58 Occupant safety
# Tension Top Tether belt4. Comply with the child restraint system manufacturer’s instal lation instructions.
# If necessary, slide head restraint1 down wards (/ page 98). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt4.
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to
protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo
compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
Ensure that the rear seat backrest is engaged. To do so, pull forcefully on the seat backrest. When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer’s
installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used.
O When using a category 0/0+ baby car seat and a category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system.
O When using a category I forward-facing child restraint system: remove the head
restraint from the respective seat, if possi ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi ately and adjust all head restraints cor rectly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly.
Occupant safety 59
O Make sure that the child’s feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.
The seat belts on the following seats are equip ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 55). # Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the rear seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat
& WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi cator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger air bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the specific instructions for rearward- facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 61). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 46). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident.
60 Occupant safety
Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the child restraint system manufac
turer’s installation and operating instruc tions.
O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possi ble. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi ately and adjust all head restraints cor rectly.
O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
O For certain child restraint systems in weight category II or III, there may be restrictions on the maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.
O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints accordingly.
O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a child seat safety feature. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 55). # Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible.
# Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
# Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
# Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat.
# Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for wards and downwards from the seat belt out let.
# If necessary, adjust the front passenger seat accordingly.
Occupant safety 61
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If people particularly children are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injury. # Never leave anyone particularly chil
dren unattended in the vehicle. # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat
tended.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users R Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
# Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.
62 Occupant safety
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.
# Press the lever in direction1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate).
# Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows
# To activate/deactivate: press button2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R indicator lamp1 is lit: via the switch on
the driver’s door
R Indicator lamp1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver’s door.
Notes on pets in the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat tended in the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. Thereby an animal may: R activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example R switch systems on or off and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuver and injure vehicle occupants in the process.
Occupant safety 63
# Never leave animals in the vehicle unat tended.
# Always correctly secure animals while driving, for example using a suitable animal carrier.
64 Occupant safety
SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
* NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields
# Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.
1 Locks 2 Indicator lamp
3 Unlocks 4 Opens/closes the tailgate 5 Panic alarm
% If indicator lamp2 does not light up after pressing the or button, the bat tery is discharged.
Replacing the SmartKey battery (/ page 67). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R The doors R The fuel filler flap R The tailgate
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti- theft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey’s functionality.
Opening and closing 65
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Acoustic Lock.
Activating/deactivating the panic alarm
Requirements: R The ignition is switched off.
# To activate: press button1 for approx imately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
# To deactivate: briefly press button1 again. or # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit
(the SmartKey is inside the vehicle).
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver’s door and fuel filler flap
# To switch between settings: press the and buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver’s door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice. R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch
the inner surface of the door handle on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door and fuel filler flap are unlocked.
Deactivating the SmartKey functions
If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. To do so, deactivate the SmartKey functions. # To deactivate: press the button on the
SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once.
# To activate: press any button on the Smart Key.
% When the vehicle is started with the Smart Key in the marked space of the center con sole, the SmartKey functions are automati cally activated (/ page 144).
66 Opening and closing
Removing/inserting the emergency key
# To remove: press release knob1. Emergency key2 is pushed out slightly.
# Pull out emergency key2 until it engages in the intermediate position.
# Press release knob1 again and fully remove emergency key2.
# To insert: press release knob1. # Insert emergency key2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages. % You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring.
Replacing the SmartKey battery
& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub stances. Swallowing batteries may cause serious damage to health. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil
dren. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 67).
Opening and closing 67
# Press release knob2 down fully and slide cover1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Fold out cover1 in the direction of the arrow and remove.
# Remove battery compartment3 and take out the discharged battery.
# Insert the new battery into battery compart ment3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat tery when doing this.
# Push in battery compartment3. # Re-attach cover1 and push it until it
engages.
Problems with the SmartKey
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
# Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 67).
# Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The SmartKey function is impaired by, for exam ple: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, Tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers
# Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.
You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified
specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Doors Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
68 Opening and closing
# To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle1.
# To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle.
# To open a rear door: pull the rear door han dle again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
# To unlock: press button1. # To lock: press button2.
The indicator lamp in the button on the driv er’s or front passenger door lights up.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the
SmartKey. R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY
LESS-GO.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY LESS-GO
Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the
vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver’s door and the door at which the
door handle is used are closed.
Opening and closing 69
# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur face of the door handle.
# To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or2.
# Convenience closing: touch recessed sen sor surface2 until the closing process has been completed.
% Further information on convenience closing (/ page 80).
If you open the tailgate from outside, it is auto matically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. Possible causes: R The SmartKey functions have been deactiva
ted (/ page 66). R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. R The SmartKey is faulty.
# Activate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66).
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
# Use the emergency key to unlock or lock the vehicle (/ page 67).
# Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal source The KEYLESS-GO function is impaired by, for example: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or auto matic barriers
# Make sure that there is a sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.
Activating/deactivating the automatic lock ing feature
The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn ing faster than walking pace.
70 Opening and closing
# To activate: press and hold button2 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
# To deactivate: press and hold button1 for approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds.
When the vehicle is locked automatically, the indicator lamp in button2 lights up.
In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R While the vehicle is being tow started/
pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna
mometer.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key
Locking/unlocking the driver’s door with the emergency key % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, first press the button for locking from the inside while the driver’s door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv er’s door using the emergency key.
# Insert the emergency key as far as it will go into opening1 in the cover.
# Pull and hold the door handle. # Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases.
# Release the door handle.
Opening and closing 71
# To unlock: turn the emergency key counter- clockwise to position1.
# To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to position1.
# Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin der until it engages and is seated firmly.
Locking the front passenger door and rear doors with the emergency key
# Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening1 on the door lock.
# To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go.
# To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from outside.
Cargo compartment Opening the tailgate
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
72 Opening and closing
* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space
behind and above the tailgate.
# Pull the tailgate handle. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make
a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 76).
Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate
# Pull remote operating switch1 for the tail gate.
# Press and hold thep button on the SmartKey.
# If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again immediately.
# For a tailgate stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards and release it as soon as it starts to open.
The tailgate is equipped with an automatic object recognition function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate during automatic opening, this process will be stopped. The auto matic object recognition function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when you are opening the tailgate.
Closing the tailgate
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Opening and closing 73
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. # Pull the tailgate downwards with the handle
and let it drop into the lock.
Vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate
Body parts may become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity
of the closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press thep button on the SmartKey.
R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver’s door. R Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle.
# Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.
# Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.
# Switch on the power supply or the ignition. # Press remote operating switch1 for the
tailgate.
74 Opening and closing
# Press closing button1 on the tailgate.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button2 on the tailgate.
If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.
# Press and hold thep button on the SmartKey (with the SmartKey in the vicinity of the vehicle).
Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS # Make a kicking movement with your foot
below the bumper (/ page 76).
Automatic reversing function for the tailgate The tailgate is equipped with automatic object recognition with a reversing function. If a solid object hinders or restricts the tailgate when it is closing automatically, the tailgate will automati cally open again slightly. Automatic object recog nition with reversing function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when you are closing the tailgate. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
The reversing function will not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R Towards the end of the closing procedure
In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the
closing area. If someone is trapped, either: R Press thep button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch
on the driver’s door. R Press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate. R Pull the tailgate handle.
Opening and closing 75
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.
Observe the notes when opening (/ page 72) and closing (/ page 73) the tailgate. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate
is opening or closing.
& WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a
kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.
* NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten tional opening of the tailgate
R when using an automatic car wash R when using a high pressure cleaner
# Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure that the key located is at least 10 ft
(3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit uations.
When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the
vehicle while performing the kicking move ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.
76 Opening and closing
1 Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros
thetic leg.
The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in the following situations: R If a person’s arms or legs are moving in the
sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R If objects are moved or placed behind the
vehicle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R If clamping straps, tarps or other coverings
are pulled over the bumper. R If a protective mat with a length reaching
over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R If the protective mat is not secured correctly.
Deactivate the SmartKey functions (/ page 66) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations.
Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate
Activating the opening angle limiter You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range to approx imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position.
# Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position.
# Press and hold the closing button on the tail gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored posi tion when opened.
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically.
Deactivating the opening angle limiter # Press and hold the closing button on the tail
gate until two short acoustic signals sound.
Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key
# Fold the rear seat backrest forward. # Remove the cargo compartment cover.
Opening and closing 77
# Insert emergency key2 into opening1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate will be unlocked.
Side windows Opening and closing the side windows
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window. # If someone is trapped, release the but
ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
# If someone is trapped, release the but ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they oper ate the side windows, particularly when unat tended. # Activate the child safety lock for the
rear passenger compartment side win dows.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Requirements: R The power supply or the ignition is switched
on.
78 Opening and closing
1 Closes 2 Opens
The buttons on the driver’s door take prece dence. # To start automatic operation: press the
W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull theW button again.
When the vehicle is switched off, the side win dows can continue being operated. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side win dows If an object impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin
gers.
R During resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent some one from becoming trapped in these situa tions. # During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing area.
# If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody
is touching the side window.
Opening and closing 79
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver’s seat is
switched on.
% If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first.
# To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
# To continue convenience opening: press and hold the button again.
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)
& WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing
When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature
is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
#
# Press and hold the button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed.
# To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.
# To close the roller sunblinds: press and hold the button again.
% Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 69).
Problems with the side windows
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to reopen the side window.
80 Opening and closing
A side window cannot be closed and you can not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the
window guide. # Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull the correspond
ing button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull the correspond
ing button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.
The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea ture. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.
# Check the battery using the indicator lamp and replace if necessary (/ page 67).
Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
% The term «sliding sunroof» also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During opening and closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil dren
Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed
Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
Opening and closing 81
# When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sun blind’s range of movement.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during automatic operation. The opening or closing process will be stopped.
* NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
* NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sun roof may damage the sealing strips.
# Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.
* NOTE Important points to remember when a roof luggage rack is installed
When a roof luggage rack is installed, raising or opening the sliding sunroof may be limi ted. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can
be raised or opened when a roof lug gage rack is installed.
# If in doubt, do not raise or open the sliding sunroof.
1 To raise 2 To open 3 To close/lower
Use the3 button to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind.
82 Opening and closing
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. # Check whether the sliding sunroof can be
raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is installed.
# To start automatic operation: press the 3 button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
# To interrupt automatic operation: briefly press the3 button in any direction. The opening/closing process will be stop ped.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The automatic raising feature is available only when the sliding sunroof is closed or raised.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an object is obstructing the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic
reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub stitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that
no body parts are in the closing area.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin
gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce
dure. R During resetting.
# During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or
# Briefly press the button in any direction during automatic operation. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an object is obstructing the roller sunblind dur ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of move ment.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.
Opening and closing 83
# Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.
or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
% The term «sliding sunroof» also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.
By pushing or pulling the3 button, you can interrupt the automatic functions: «Rain closing function when driving» and «Automatic lower ing».
Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.
Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised
at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sliding sunroof’s range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
# If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for wards or backwards.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi ately after it has been blocked or reset, it will close with increased force. # Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if
somebody becomes trapped. or # Briefly press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process. The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term «sliding sunroof» also refers to the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:
84 Opening and closing
# Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the3 button down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with even greater force.
Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun
blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Pull and hold the3 button little by little
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. # Pull and hold the3 button little by little
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
# Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when the ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicles battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R when a door is opened R when the tailgate is opened R when the hood is opened R when interior protection is triggered
(/ page 87) R when the tow-away alarm is triggered
(/ page 86)
The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa tions: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Opening and closing 85
Indicator lamp1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R after unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
R after pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 144)
% When the MercedesBenz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 259).
% In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.
Deactivating the ATA # Press the, orp button on the
SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button with the Smart
Key in the marked space (/ page 144)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle with the
SmartKey outside the vehicle.
Function of the tow-away alarm
% This function may not be available in all countries.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle’s angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol lowing components are closed: R the doors R the tailgate
The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva ted: R after pressing the orp button on
the SmartKey R after pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the stowage compartment (/ page 144)
86 Opening and closing
R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 170).
Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle submenu in the Settings main menu to arm or disarm the tow-away alarm.
Function of the interior motion sensor
% This function may not be available in all countries.
When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati cally after approximately ten seconds: R after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R the doors R the tailgate
The interior motion sensor is automatically deac tivated: R after pressing the orp button on
the SmartKey R after pressing the start/stop button with the
SmartKey in the storage compartment (/ page 144)
R after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO R when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R moving objects such as mascots in the vehi
cle interior R when the side window is open R when the panoramic sliding sunroof is open
Arming/deactivating the interior motion sen sor
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sen-
sor. The interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again.
Opening and closing 87
% If quick access is unavailable, select the Vehicle menu under Settings to activate or deactivate the interior motion sensor.
88 Opening and closing
Notes on the correct driver’s seat position
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver’s seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver’s seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.
Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel1, seat belt2 and driver’s seat3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver’s
airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration. R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
R Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly R The back of your head is supported at eye
level by the center of the head restraint R You can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent R You can move your legs freely R You can see all the displays on the instru
ment cluster clearly R You have a good overview of the traffic con
ditions R Your seat belt sits snugly against your body
and passes across the center of your shoul der and across your hips in the pelvic area
Seats and stowing 89
Notes on the height limit on the third row of seats
& WARNING Risk of injury if height limit on the third row is not observed
If a person exceeds the permissible body size for the seats in the third row of seats, he or she may be injured through contact with the roof or parts of the vehicle interior. For that reason, a person of the relevant height must not use the seats on the third row. # Use a suitable vehicle seat.
The seats on the third row are approved only for people with a maximum height of 66.1 in (1.68 m). Observe the information regarding height on the information label.
Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with out Seat Comfort Package)
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on «Airbags» and «Chil dren in the vehicle».
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver’s seat not being engaged
The driver’s seat may move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver’s seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
90 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver’s seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver’s seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. You could slip beneath the seat belt and injure yourself. # Adjust the seat properly before com
mencing your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
Seats and stowing 91
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever1 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2 until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat Comfort Package)
# To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 1 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
# To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever2 and slide the seat into the desired position.
# Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion inclination:
turn handwheel3 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4 until the desired position has been reached.
# To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn handwheel5 forwards and backwards until the desired position has been reached.
92 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the front seat electrically
1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat fore-and-aft position
# Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 103).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1 Higher 2 Softer 3 Lower 4 Firmer
# Using buttons1 to4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back.
Adjusting rear seats mechanically
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The seat and seat backrest can fold for wards. There is a risk of the following, in particular: R The vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R A child restraint system will no longer be
properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfill its function as intended.
Seats and stowing 93
R The seat backrest will not be able restrain objects or goods in the cargo compart ment.
Always ensure that the seat and seat back rest are engaged, in particular: R Before persons travel in the vehicle while
sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature R After you have adjusted the seat R After the easy entry and exit feature has
been used R After the cargo compartment enlarge
ment has been folded forwards
& WARNING Risk of injury when you adjust the rear seats while the vehicle is in motion
You or other vehicle occupants could be trap ped and thereby injured. # Adjust the rear seats before the engine
is started.
* NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the rear seats
When adjusting the fore-and-aft position, the rear seats and/or the object can be dam aged. # Stow objects in a suitable place.
The components of the rear bench seat can be moved. You can move the right-hand and left- hand part together with the center part inde pendently of each other. This allows you to make the footwell larger in either the second or third row of seats.
# Lift release handle1 and slide the corre sponding part of the bench seat into the desired position.
# Let go of release handle1. # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
94 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the rear seat backrests mechani cally
& WARNING Risk of injury due to seat backrest folded forwards
If the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, persons in the third row of seats could col lide with parts of the seat adjustment mech anism, in particular in the event of an acci dent, sudden braking or an abrupt change of direction. # If there is a person in the third row of
seats, the rear seat in front of that per son must be folded back into the driv ing position before starting the journey.
# People in the third row of seats must not place their legs on a rear seat back rest that has been folded forwards.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.
If you no longer require the seat backrest to be folded down for loading or for getting in and out, fold it back into place.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded for wards. The seat can fold backwards unex pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident. People in the seat’s sweep can become trap ped. # If a seat is folded forwards, always fold
it back before driving off. # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Requirements: R The area into which the seat is folded is
clear.
You can fold the seat backrests on the second row of seats forwards for the following situa tions: R For easier access to the cargo compartment R Vehicles with a third row of seats: for getting
in or out
You can move the seat backrest to different angles.
# To set the seat backrest: hold the seat backrest in place with your hand or back.
# Gently pull one of release loops1 and fold the seat backrest forwards or backwards.
# Ensure that the seat backrest is engaged.
Seats and stowing 95
Folding the seat backrest forwards to enter the vehicle (vehicles with a third row of seats)
& WARNING Risk of injury when folding the seat backrest on the second row of seats forwards
If the handle for the seat backrest on the second row of seats is pulled from the third row of seats, the seat backrest on the sec ond row of seats will fold forwards and will not engage. People in the sweep of this seat backrest can become trapped. # When getting out of the third row of
seats, do not hold the seat backrest on the second row of seats.
Vehicles with EASY-ENTRY function: If a seat on the second row of seats is located in the EASY-ENTRY area, this will be shown on the mul tifunction display on the instrument cluster. # If necessary, fold the seats on the third row
into position (/ page 112).
# To fold the seat backrest in the front posi tion: pull handle1. The seat backrest will fold forwards.
* NOTE Damage to the seat backrest han dle caused by pulling
The handle can be damaged if it is used to pull the seat forwards.
# Move the seat forwards by the seat backrest.
# Move the seat forwards by the seat backrest. Hold the seat firmly in place while doing so.
# To fold the seat backrest back into an upright position: swing the seat backrest back until it engages. The seat backrest will remain in the cargo position.
# Slide the seat backwards. The seat will stop in the front position.
# Move the seat into the desired position (/ page 93).
# If necessary, fold in the seats on the third row (/ page 110).
% To increase the size of the cargo compart ment, you can move the seat backrests into the trunk floor position (/ page 107).
96 Seats and stowing
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints man ually
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver’s seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver’s seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints
installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be able to adjust the height and angle of the head restraints correctly. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.
# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # To lower: press release knob1 in the direc
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
# To move the driver’s head restraint for wards: press release knob2 and pull the head restraint forwards.
Seats and stowing 97
# To move the driver’s head restraint back wards: press release knob2 and push the head restraint backwards.
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically
# To raise: pull the head restraint up.
# To lower: press release knob1 in the direc tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down.
# If the center seat on the second row of seats is not occupied: press the head restraint down all the way.
Vehicles with a third row of seats The head restraints on the third row of seats have a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the extended, top position in which the head restraint engages; the non- usage position is the bottom, retracted position of the head restraint. If the seats on the third row of seats are being used, the head restraint must be in the top, engaged usage position. # If the third row of seats is occupied: move
the head restraints to the very top and have them engage there.
# If the third row of seats is not occupied: move the head restraints to the very bottom.
Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints
Removing
# Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for wards slightly (/ page 107).
# Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go.
98 Seats and stowing
# Push release knob1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Installing # Insert the head restraint such that the
notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel.
# Push the head restraint down until it engages.
# Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.
Configuring the seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort
Adjusting the backrest contour in the lumbar region of the seat backrest (lumbar) # Select Lumbar. # Select the settingsZ for the desired seat. # Adjust the air cushions.
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters # Select Side Bolsters. # Adjust the air cushion for the desired seat.
Selecting the massage program for the front seats
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select Wave Massage or Pulsating Massage. # Start the program for the desired seat;. # To set the massage intensity: switch High
Intensity on or off.
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Seat Comfort # Select for the desired seat. # Confirm the prompt.
Switching the seat heating on/off
& WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat edly switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. The health of persons with limited tempera ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it is switched on repeatedly.
* NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on
When the seat heating is switched on, over heating may occur due to objects or docu
Seats and stowing 99
ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu
ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.
% The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Requirements: R The power supply is switched on.
# Press button1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.
100 Seats and stowing
Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel mechanically
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver’s seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver’s seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil dren when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# To unlock: push release lever1 down as far as it will go.
# Adjust height2 and distance3 to the steering wheel.
# To lock: push release lever1 up as far as it will go.
# Check and make sure that the steering col umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Switching the steering wheel heating on/off
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Seats and stowing 101
# Push the switch into position1 or2. If indicator lamp3 lights up, the steering wheel heating is switched on.
When you switch the ignition off, the steering wheel heating switches off.
Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature
& WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process for the easy exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc
ess is complete before pulling away.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature
You and other vehicle occupants could become trapped. # Ensure that no-one has any body parts
in the range of movement of the seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver’s seat:
# Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stop ped.
You can stop the adjustment process by press ing one of the memory function position switches.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during activation of the easy entry and exit feature by children
If children activate the easy entry and exit feature, they can become trapped, particu larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
102 Seats and stowing
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the driver’s seat will move backwards and the backrest will be moved to a steeper position when: R You switch the ignition off with the driver’s
door open. R You open the driver’s door with the ignition
switched off.
% The driver’s seat will then move backwards only if it is not already in the rearmost posi tion. The seat backrest will then move forwards only if it is not already in the foremost posi tion.
The driver’s seat will move back to the last drive position when: R You switch the ignition on with the driver’s
door closed. R You close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on.
The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch the ignition off.
R You call up the seat settings via the memory function. R You save the seat settings via the memory
function.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Automatic Seat Adjustment 5 Easy Entry/Exit # Activate or deactivate the function.
Operating the memory function
& WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driv er’s side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.
# Only use the memory function on the driver’s side when the vehicle is station ary.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment when set ting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants particu larly children could become trapped. # During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
# If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust ment switch immediately.
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children
Children could become trapped if they acti vate the memory function, particularly when unattended.
Seats and stowing 103
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the igni tion is switched off.
Storing Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save settings for the following systems: R Seat R Seat contour R Outside mirrors R Head-up Display
# Set the desired position for all systems. # Briefly press theV memory button and
then press preset position4,T or U within three seconds.
# To call up: press and briefly hold one of pre set position buttons4,T orU. After releasing the button, all systems are moved into the stored position.
Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before
opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
& WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
104 Seats and stowing
# Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
# Before the journey, secure objects, lug gage or loads against slipping or tipping over.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If you do not adequately stow objects in the vehicle interior, they could slip or be tossed around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always restrain the objects they contain in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be tossed about in these or similar situations.
# Always make sure that objects do not project from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
& WARNING Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving
The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi
cle is stationary.
# Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
# Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
* NOTE Damage to the cup holder
When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when
the cup holder is closed.
* NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the
rear seat armrest.
Seats and stowing 105
& WARNING Risk of injury due to an open cargo compartment floor
If you drive with the cargo compartment floor open, objects could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants as a result. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always close the cargo compartment
floor before a journey.
& WARNING Risk of burns due to hot audio amplifier
The audio amplifier and the area around the audio amplifier in the stowage space under the cargo compartment floor can get very hot. If you touch these vehicle parts, you may suf fer burns. # Always take special care when the
cargo compartment floor in the area around the audio amplifier is open.
# Allow the vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
# Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
# Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or
the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle’s B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
106 Seats and stowing
R Always use the partition net when transport ing objects in the cargo compartment. R Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and
distribute the load evenly.
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front storage compartments
1 Storage space in the doors 2 Storage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection
3 Storage compartment in the front center console with a USB port
4 Glove box
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded for wards. The seat can fold backwards unex pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident.
People in the seat’s sweep can become trap ped. # If a seat is folded forwards, always fold
it back before driving off. # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place. Requirements: R The area into which the seat is folded is
clear. R The area under the rear bench seat is clear. R The armrest on the second row of seats is
folded back and the cup holders are empty.
Seats and stowing 107
# Trap the seat belt strap on seat belt2 in seat belt strap holder1.
When the left-hand seat backrest is folded for wards, the center seat backrest will also be fol ded forwards.
# Move the driver’s seat forwards. # If necessary, release the head restraints for
the seat backrest and push them down as far as possible (/ page 98).
# Left and right seat backrests: pull one of release loops1. The seat backrest will automatically fold for wards.
# Center seat backrest: pull release loop2. The seat backrest will automatically fold for wards.
108 Seats and stowing
% When the seat backrests on the second and third rows of seats are folded forwards, you can push the rear bench seat on the second row of seats back. This will then provide a continuous cargo compartment surface. Ensure that the area between the rows of seats is clear.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving.
R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo
compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap
ped when folding back the seat back rest.
If the left and center seat backrests have been folded forwards together, fold the left seat back rest back first.
# Move the driver’s or front passenger seat for wards, if necessary.
# Swivel seat backrest1 back until it engages. The seat backrest will remain in the cargo position.
# After the seat backrest has been folded back, check the position of the head restraint and set it to the correct position (/ page 98).
Seats and stowing 109
Folding the seat backrest on the third row of seats forwards
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The seat and seat backrest can fold for wards. There is a risk of the following, in particular: R The vehicle occupant may be pressed
against the seat belt. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury.
R A child restraint system will no longer be properly supported or positioned and will no longer fulfill its function as intended. R The seat backrest will not be able restrain
objects or goods in the cargo compart ment.
Always ensure that the seat and seat back rest are engaged, in particular: R Before persons travel in the vehicle while
sitting on a seat with the easy entry and exit feature R After you have adjusted the seat R After the easy entry and exit feature has
been used R After the cargo compartment enlarge
ment has been folded forwards
& WARNING Risk of injury due to seat backrest folded forwards
If the rear seat backrest is folded forwards, persons in the third row of seats could col
lide with parts of the seat adjustment mech anism, in particular in the event of an acci dent, sudden braking or an abrupt change of direction. # If there is a person in the third row of
seats, the rear seat in front of that per son must be folded back into the driv ing position before starting the journey.
# People in the third row of seats must not place their legs on a rear seat back rest that has been folded forwards.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place. You can fold the front seat backrests and the seat backrests on the second row of seats for wards to get in or out.
110 Seats and stowing
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat is not engaged
The seat does not engage when folded for wards. The seat can fold backwards unex pectedly, e.g. when accelerating, braking or in the event of an abrupt change of direction or an accident. People in the seat’s sweep can become trap ped. # If a seat is folded forwards, always fold
it back before driving off. # Make sure that the seat is engaged.
Requirements: R The area into which the seat is folded is
clear. R The area under the third row of seats is clear. R The cup holders are empty when the seat
backrests on the third row of seats are fol ded forwards. R The cargo compartment cover is removed
when the seat backrests on the second row of seats are folded forwards.
# Trap the seat belt strap on seat belt2 in seat belt strap holder1.
* NOTE Damage to the release loops due to the attachment of objects
The release loops of the seat backrests in the rear passenger compartment may be damaged due to the attachment of objects. # Only attach objects to the tie-down
eyes.
The release loops are located in the cargo com partment to the side of the bottom part of the seat backrests.
Release loops on the backs
# Move the second row of seats forwards and move the seat backrests into the cargo posi tion (/ page 113).
# Release the head restraints on the third row of seats and push them down (/ page 98).
# Pull one of red release loops1. The seat backrest will automatically fold for wards.
# Push the seat backrest down until it engages.
Seats and stowing 111
% When the seat backrests on the second and third rows of seats are folded forwards, you can push the rear bench seat on the second row of seats back. This will then provide a continuous cargo compartment surface. Ensure that the area between the rows of seats is clear.
Folding back the seat backrest on the third row of seats
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap your self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
& WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo
compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest.
# Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip.
* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap
ped when folding back the seat back rest.
Requirements: R The seats and the seat backrests on the sec
ond row of seats have been moved forwards sufficiently.
* NOTE Damage to the release loops due to the attachment of objects
The release loops of the seat backrests in the rear passenger compartment may be damaged due to the attachment of objects. # Only attach objects to the tie-down
eyes.
112 Seats and stowing
Loops on the rear sides
# Briefly pull one of red release loops2. # To fold the left and right seat backrests
back: pull one of black release loops1.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr ests (cargo position) To enlarge the cargo compartment, you can move the seat backrests on the second row of seats into a steeper angle (cargo position).
# To set the seat backrest: hold seat back rest1 in place with your hand or back.
# Gently pull one of release loops2 and fold the seat backrest forwards.
Cargo compartment cover
Notes on the cargo compartment cover
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The cargo compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.
* NOTE Damage to the cargo compart ment cover when loading the vehicle
The cargo compartment cover may be dam aged when the vehicle is being loaded.
Seats and stowing 113
# Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the cargo compartment cover.
Vehicles with a third row of seats: when the third row of seats is in use, the cargo compartment cover on the seat backrests on the second row of seats is removed.
Extending/retracting the cargo compart ment cover
# To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover back by grab handle1 and clip it into the holders on the left and right2.
Retracting # Unhook the cargo compartment cover from
holders on the left and right2 and guide it
forwards by grab handle1 until it is fully retracted.
Installing or removing the cargo compart ment cover Requirements: R The cargo compartment cover is rolled up.
Removing the cargo compartment cover
114 Seats and stowing
# Press in the end cap of cargo compartment cover1 on the right- and left-hand side in the direction of the arrow using the handle on lower edge3.
# Push cargo compartment cover1 into anchorage2 on the opposite side.
# Take cargo compartment cover1 out by pulling it upwards.
Installing the cargo compartment cover
# Place cargo compartment cover1 in anchorage2 on the right- or left-hand side.
# Press in the end cap of cargo compartment cover1 on the opposite side and insert
cargo compartment cover1 into other anchorage2.
Attaching/removing the partitioning net
& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects
The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, par ticularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads
against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the partitioning net.
For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load.
Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfill their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Partitioning net without cargo compartment enlargement
Seats and stowing 115
Partitioning net with cargo compartment enlarge ment
# To attach: attach partitioning net1 to brackets2 on the left and right of the head liner.
# Without cargo compartment enlargement: attach hooks3 to tie-down eyes4 on the
left and right in such a way that hooks3 point backwards.
# With cargo compartment enlargement: attach hooks3 to tie-down eyes4 on the left and right in such a way that hooks3 point to the door.
# Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at the same time until partitioning net1 is tight and the top edge of partitioning net1 is horizontal.
# To remove: turn the buckle of the lashing strap in the direction of arrow6.
# Slide the loose end of the lashing strap into the buckle in the direction of arrow5 until the lashing straps are loose.
# Remove hooks3 from tie-down eyes4 on the left and right.
# Remove partitioning net1 from brackets 2 on the headliner on the left and right.
116 Seats and stowing
Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 104).
* NOTE Damage to the release loops due to the attachment of objects
The release loops of the seat backrests in the rear passenger compartment may be damaged due to the attachment of objects. # Only attach objects to the tie-down
eyes.
1 Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat)
Overview of bag hooks
& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag
hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 104). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg) and do not attach any goods to them.
Seats and stowing 117
1 Bag hook
Overview of clothes hooks on the tailgate
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 104).
1 Clothes hook
Clothes hooks are not suitable for hanging heavy objects as this can cause the tailgate to lower automatically. Use the clothes hooks only for light objects such as jackets.
Adjustable cargo compartment floor
The cargo compartment can be made larger or smaller depending on requirements. To this end, you can lock the cargo compartment floor at two different heights. The higher position provides a flat surface when the rear seat backrests are fol ded forward. Furthermore, you can remove a bracket at the rear to create additional space lengthways.
# To adjust the height: lift cargo compart ment floor1 (in the lower position in the example) only slightly using handle3 and pull it towards you.
118 Seats and stowing
# Insert cargo compartment floor1 into rear fixtures2.
# Fold cargo compartment floor1 down.
# To adjust the length: fold the seat backr ests in the rear passenger compartment forward slightly.
# Make sure that cargo compartment floor1 is engaged in the lower position.
# Press a release catch5 and remove bracket 4 upwards.
* NOTE Damage to the cargo compart ment floor
If the cargo compartment floor is loaded in the upper position and the bracket has been removed, the cargo compartment floor may be damaged. # Make sure that the cargo compartment
floor is not loaded in the upper position when the bracket has been removed.
Attaching a roof luggage rack
& WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load
The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will find information on the maximum roof load in the «Technical data» section.
* NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to non- approved roof luggage racks
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is installed,
open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for Mercedes- Benz.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
# Secure the roof luggage rack to the roof rail ing.
# Observe the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Seats and stowing 119
Sockets Using the 12 V socket
Requirements: R Only devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the storage compartment in the front cen
ter console R In the storage compartment under the front
armrest R In the cargo compartment
Example: 12 V socket in the storage compartment in the front center console
# Fold up socket cap1. # Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the storage compartment with cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the storage compartment open.
Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam aged connecting cables or sockets
You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry
and free of damage. # When the ignition is switched off, make
sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power
socket checked or replaced at a quali fied specialized workshop if it is dam aged or has been pulled out of the trim.
# Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
120 Seats and stowing
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor rect handling of the socket
You could receive an electric shock in partic ular: R If you reach into the socket. R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects
into the socket.
# Do not reach into the socket. # Only connect suitable devices to the
socket.
Requirements: R Devices are equipped with a suitable plug
which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R A device up to a maximum of 150 W (1.3 A)
is used. R Do not use multiple socket outlets.
# Open flap3. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V
socket1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp2 lights up.
Overview of USB ports
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports: R In the stowage compartment of the cockpit
armrest (/ page 107) R In the front center console next to the mobile
phone stowage compartment R In the rear passenger compartment center
console R Vehicles with three seat rows: in the side
stowage compartment of the cargo compart ment
% Depending on the vehicle equipment, the design of the stowage compartment and the number of USB ports in the rear passenger compartment center console may vary.
If the ignition is switched on you can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile phone, at USB ports using a suitable charging cable.
Seats and stowing 121
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can
not be thrown around in such situa tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not
place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.
* NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor age compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, they may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, data storage
devices, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compart ment.
* NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
122 Seats and stowing
The following notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone must be observed: R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle’s exterior antenna via the charging module. R The charging function and wireless connec
tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle’s exterior antenna are only available if the igni tion is switched on. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle’s exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This may particularly depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. R To ensure more efficient charging and con
nection with the vehicle’s exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile
phone. Protective covers which are neces sary for wireless charging are excluded.
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone
Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging. You can find a list of compatible mobile phones at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com
# Place the mobile phone as close to the cen ter of the marked surface on mat1 as pos sible with the display facing upwards. When a message is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. Malfunctions during the charging process are shown in the media display.
% The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
Stowage compartment without cover Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored and secured to prevent it from falling out while you are driving.
Seats and stowing 123
# To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2 out.
Installing/removing the floor mats
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver’s footwell
Objects in the driver’s footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver’s footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
Installing floor mats
# Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell.
# Press studs1 onto holders2. # Adjust the corresponding seat.
Removing floor mats # To remove: pull the floor mat off holders2.
# Remove the floor mat.
124 Seats and stowing
Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps and license plate lamp 4 Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position) 5 L Low beam/high beam
6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off 7 N Switches the front fog lamp on/off
When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lamps will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi
cient lighting, in accordance with the rele vant legal stipulations.
* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights
Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the
right X or left W parking light.
In the event of severe battery discharging, the parking lamps or standing lamps will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
Light and visibility 125
The exterior lighting (except standing and park ing lamps) will switch off automatically when the driver’s door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting
(/ page 129).
Automatic driving lights function The parking lamps, low beam and daytime run ning lamps are switched on automatically depending on the ignition status and the ambi ent light.
& WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility
When the light switch is set to, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or posi
tion.
# Press the R button.
Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.
Operating the combination switch for the lights
1 High beam 2 Turn signal light, right 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left
# Use the combination switch to activate the desired function.
126 Light and visibility
High beam # To switch on: turn the light switch to the
L or position. # Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam is deactivated and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam.
# To switch off: push the combination switch in the direction of arrow1 or pull it in the direction of arrow3.
High-beam flasher # Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow3.
Turn signal light # To indicate briefly: push the combination
switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.
# To indicate permanently: push the combi nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow2 or4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R Indicator operation activated by the driver
can extend for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand
but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
# Press button1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto matically if: R The airbag has been deployed.
Light and visibility 127
Cornering light
Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when
the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned
R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned
Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle’s current GPS position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersec tion.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes
trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic
conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle’s lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi tions.
128 Light and visibility
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam
At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high
beam will be switched on automatically.
The high beam switches off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h). R If other road users are detected. R If street lighting is sufficient.
At speeds greater than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h): R The headlamp range of the low beam is regu
lated automatically based on the distance to other road users.
The system’s optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off # To switch on: turn the light switch to
the position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina
tion switch. When the high beam is switched on automat ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp on the multifunction display will light up.
# To switch off: switch off the high beam using the combination switch.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time
Requirements: R The light switch is in the position.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Exterior Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time.
When the vehicle engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.
Switching the surround lighting on/off
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Locator Lighting When Locator Lighting is active, the exterior lighting lights up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the sur round lighting is deactivated and the automatic driving lights are activated.
Light and visibility 129
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1 p Front left reading lamp 2 | Automatic interior lighting control 3 c Front interior lighting 4 u Rear interior lighting 5 p Front right reading lamp
# To switch on or off: press button1 5 accordingly.
Control panel in the grab handle
1 p Rear reading lamp
# To switch on or off: press button1.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system: 4 5 Comfort 5 Ambient Lighting
Setting the color # Select Color.
# Set the desired color.
Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness.
Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Select Brightness Zones. # Activate or deactivate the function. or # Set the brightness for the desired zones.
Activating multi-color lighting # Select Color. # Select Multi-color. # Select a color combination.
Activating multi-color animation # Select Color. # Select Multi-color Animation.
The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals.
130 Light and visibility
Activating welcome lighting # Select Color. # Select Welcome.
When the vehicle is unlocked, a special ambi ent lighting sequence will run.
Activating dependency on air conditioning settings # Select Color. # Select Climate.
If changes are made to the temperature set ting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch the switch-off delay time on or off.
When this function is active, the interior light ing lights up for a short time after the vehicle is locked.
Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off
1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Automatic wiping, normal 3 Automatic wiping, frequent
4 Continuous wiping, slow 5 Continuous wiping, fast
# Turn the combination switch to the correct position1 -5.
# Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow1. R Single wipe R Wipes with washer fluid
Light and visibility 131
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
1 Single wipe/washing 2 Intermittent wipe
# Single wipe: press button1 to the point of resistance.
# Wiping with washer fluid: press button1 beyond the point of resistance.
# Switching intermittent wipe on/off: press button2. The symbol will appear on the instru ment cluster when the rear window wiper is switched on.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the ignition on and switch off again
immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold
the button on the combination switch
for approximately three seconds (/ page 131). The wiper arms will move into the replace ment position.
Removing the wiper blades # Fold the wiper arms away from the wind
shield.
132 Light and visibility
# Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc tion of arrow1 away from the wiper arm as far as it will go.
# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the removal position.
# Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow4.
Installing the wiper blades
# Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow1.
# Slide catch2 in the direction of arrow3 until it engages in the locking position.
# Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor rectly.
# Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind shield.
# Switch on the ignition. # Press the button on the combination
switch (/ page 131). The wiper arms will move into the original position.
# Switch the ignition off.
Light and visibility 133
Maintenance display
# Remove protective film1 from the mainte nance display on the tip of the newly instal led wiper blades.
When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.
% The duration until the color changes varies depending on the usage conditions.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.
Removing the wiper blade # Switch the ignition off.
# Fold wiper arm2 away from the rear win dow until it engages in the replacement posi tion.
# Unclip wiper blade1 from wiper arm2 and remove it in the direction of arrow3.
134 Light and visibility
Installing the wiper blade
# Position wiper blade1 with both lugs3 on holder2 on the wiper arm.
# Push wiper blade1 in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages in holder2.
# Make sure that wiper blade1 is seated cor rectly.
# Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window.
Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors
& WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting vehicle settings while the vehi cle is in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver’s seat, the head
restraints, the steering wheel or the mir ror while the vehicle is in motion. R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi
cle is in motion.
# Before starting the engine: adjust the driver’s seat, the head restraints, the steering wheel and the mirror and fas ten your seat belt.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to mis judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror
The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. # Therefore, always look over your shoul
der in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.
Light and visibility 135
# To fold in or out: briefly press button2. # To set: press button1 or3 to select the
outside mirror to be adjusted. # Press button4 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
% If the battery has been disconnected or com pletely discharged, you will have to reset the
outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.
# To adjust: briefly press button2. An outside mirror that has been pushed out of position can be engaged in position again as fol lows: # Vehicles without electrically folding out
side mirrors: Manually move the outside mirror into the correct position.
# Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: Press and hold button2. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi bly click into place. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors function
& WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec trolyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro
lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact
with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R Immediately change out of clothing
which has been contaminated with electrolyte. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
136 Light and visibility
The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir ror on the driver’s side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.
System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The engine is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi tion function
The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger’s side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 137). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans
mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than
9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror
on the driver’s side.
Storing the parking position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
# Press button1 to select the front- passenger outside mirror.
# Engage reverse gear. # Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button2.
Light and visibility 137
Calling up # Press button1 to select the front-
passenger outside mirror. # Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Switch Automatic Folding on or off.
138 Light and visibility
Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control
An interior air filter in combination with the pre filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Make sure that the filter is installed correctly and the filter housing in the engine compartment is closed correctly using the cap and always tightly sealed when in operation. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have service work car ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Overview of the control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
The indicator lamps in the,,, g, and0 buttons indicate that the corresponding function is activated.
1 w Sets the temperature on the driver’s side
2 _ Sets the air distribution 3H Sets the airflow or switches off climate
control 4 Sets climate control to automatic
(/ page 140) 5 Defrosts the windshield 6 Switches the rear window heater
on/off 7 g Switches air-recirculation mode on/
off(/ page 141) 8 Switches the A/C function on/
off(/ page 139)
Switches residual heat on/off (/ page 141) 90 Activates/deactivates synchroniza
tion(/ page 140) A w Sets the temperature on the front
passenger side
Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off
# To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using theH button.
# To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using theH button.
% If climate control is switched off, the win dows may fog up more quickly. Switch off climate control only briefly.
Switching the A/C function on or off via the control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle’s interior air. # Press the/ button.
Climate control 139
Switch off the A/C function only briefly; other wise, the windows may fog up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Calling up the air conditioning menu
Calling up the air conditioning menu using the multimedia system # Select one of the temperature displays at the
lower edge of the media display.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle’s interior air. # Call up the air-conditioning menu
(/ page 140). # Select First Row of Seats. # Select A/C.
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con trolled and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press the button. # To switch to manual mode: press the_
or button.
In automatic mode, you can choose between five different air quantities using theH button. Automatic mode is retained.
Setting the air distribution
# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 140).
# Select a row of seats. # To set the air distribution: select,
P orO. # Set the airflow. % Several air distribution options can be selec
ted at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the windshield and the footwells simultaneously.
The climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the control panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature and air distribution settings for the driver’s side will be adopted automatically for the front passenger side. # Press the0 button.
The synchronization function will be deactivated if the settings for one of the other climate zones are changed.
Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the multimedia system
Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver’s settings for temperature, air quantity and air distribution are adopted automatically for all climate zones.
140 Climate control
# Call up the air conditioning menu (/ page 140).
# Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC.
Removing condensation from the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside # Press the button. # If the windows continue to fog up: press the
button.
Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press the button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off
# Press theg button. The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after some time.
% If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.
Switching the residual heat on/off (Canada)
Requirements: R The vehicle is parked.
% Only vehicles with a diesel engine can use residual heat.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To activate: press the button.
Residual heat will be switched off automatically.
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
& WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
# If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and the vent grille in
the vehicle interior free. R Keep the air inlet free of deposits
(/ page 276).
Climate control 141
# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the center and turn it counter clockwise (open) or clockwise (closed) as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
# To open or close: hold air vent1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go.
# To set the airflow direction: hold air vent1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right.
142 Climate control
Driving Switching on the power supply or the igni tion (without engine start)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
Also observe the «Notes on pets in the vehicle». Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and has been
recognized. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The brake pedal is not depressed.
# To switch on the power supply: press but ton1 once. You can activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if the fol lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver’s door. R You press button1 twice more.
Driving and parking 143
# To switch on the ignition: press button1 twice. The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up.
The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi tionj or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but ton
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there
are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.
Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog
nized.
# Shift the transmission to positionj ori. # Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once.
# If the vehicle does not start: switch off non- essential consumers and press button1 once.
# If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator’s Manual message also appears in the multifunction display: start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 144).
% You can switch off the engine while driving by pressing button1 for about three sec onds or by pressing button1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under «Driving tips» (/ page 147).
Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator’s Manual message appears in the multifunction display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.
144 Driving and parking
Marked space (example with cup holder without cover)
# Open the cover of marked space2 if neces sary.
# Make sure that marked space2 is empty. # Remove SmartKey1 from the key ring.
# Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 on symbol3. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove SmartKey1 from marked space2 the engine continues running. For further engine starts however, SmartKey1 must be located in marked space2 on sym bol3 during the entire journey.
# Have SmartKey1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the vehicle does not start: # Place SmartKey1 in marked space2 and
leave it there. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi
cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or
the ignition with the start/stop button.
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv ices
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before commencing your journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
Charging the starter battery before starting the journey If the vehicle battery is discharged, you receive a message on your smartphone. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.
Driving and parking 145
Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
& WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap ment due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. # Always secure the engine against unin
tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.
Requirements: R Park positionj is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched
off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
# Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecu tive starting attempts. The vehicle must be star ted once with the SmartKey before trying to start the engine again with the smartphone. you can stop the vehicle again at any time. % Further information can be found in the
smartphone app.
Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors.
or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Breaking-in notes
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. To preserve the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R drive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds. R drive the vehicle in drive programA
or;. R shift to the next highest gear at the very lat
est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. R do not shift down a gear manually in order to
brake. R avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
146 Driving and parking
R vehicles with automatic transmission: do not depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown). R only increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R in certain driving and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. R brakepads, brake discs and tires that are
either new or have been replaced only ach ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred miles of driving. Compen sate for the reduced braking effect by apply ing greater force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver’s footwell
Objects in the driver’s footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver’s footwell.
# Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
# Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers
# Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.
& WARNING Risk of accident when switch ing off the ignition when driving
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. You will then need, for example, to use con siderably more force to steer and brake. # Do not switch off the ignition while driv
ing.
Driving and parking 147
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present,
the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.
& WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces
If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur
faces to increase the engine braking effect.
& DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi sonous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run ning.
# Open a window on the side of the vehi cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco hol and drugs while driving
Driving when under the influence of alcohol and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous combination. Even small quantities of alcohol or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception and judgment.
The probability of a serious or even fatal acci dent greatly increases if you drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs. # Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while
driving, and do not allow anyone to drive who has been drinking alcohol or taking drugs.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system may even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.
148 Driving and parking
* NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over
revving range.
* NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal
# Do not depress the brake pedal contin uously whilst driving.
# To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away
# Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi ately.
# Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.
* NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata lytic converter. # Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly. # Have the cause rectified immediately at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R due to salt build-up on the brake discs and
brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R maintain a much greater safe distance to the
vehicle in front
To remove salt build-up: R brake occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next journey
Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R reduce speed R avoid tire ruts R avoid sudden steering movements R brake carefully
% Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 305).
Driving and parking 149
Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at walking pace at most, otherwise
water can enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi
cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water.
The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.
Notes on off-road driving
& WARNING Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines
If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll over. # Always drive on inclines in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn.
& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or off-
road, regularly check the vehicle under side.
# Remove trapped plants or other flam mable material, in particular.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
When driving off-road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or hear scraping noises, have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteris tics.
* NOTE Damage caused by driving over obstacles
The vehicle can be damaged by: R driving up onto high curbs or unpaved
roads. R quickly driving over obstacles such as
curbs, speed bumps or potholes.
150 Driving and parking
R heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components.
# Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle.
# Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving.
# Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions.
# If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to non-observance of pro hibition signs
Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect. # Be sure to observe prohibition signs.
% The vehicle is designed for easily negotiable and moderate off-road terrain. When driving off-road, make sure there is sufficient ground clearance.
Checklist before driving off-road Check the following points before driving off- road: R Fuel level R Engine oil level: fill engine oil to the maxi
mum level to ensure full gradeability (/ page 273). R Tire-change tool kit and spare wheel R Tires and wheels
Off-road driving Read this section before driving your vehicle off- road. Practice by driving over more gentle off- road terrain first. R Observe the notes on the cross-country ABS
(/ page 174). R If necessary, select theF (/ page 155)
drive program before driving off-road.
R Always keep the engine running and in gear when driving on downhill gradients and slopes. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain.
R Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on marked routes. R Always keep the doors and windows closed
while the vehicle is in motion. R Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and cruise control. R Adapt your driving style to the terrain. R Do not use the HOLD function on steep
downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces.
Driving on sand When driving on sand, also observe the following instructions: R Select theF drive program. R Shift to a lower gear. R Drive quickly to overcome the rolling resist
ance, otherwise the vehicle may dig itself in. R Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi
ble. Make sure that the following prerequi sites are met: — the tire ruts are not too deep — the sand is firm enough
Driving and parking 151
— the ground clearance is sufficient
Fording Also observe the following information when fording: R Drive no faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The water, when calm, may only reach the
lower edge of the vehicle body. R Switch off automatic climate control
(/ page 140). R Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you
drive. R Do not stop in the water and do not switch
off the engine. Ensure the ECO start/stop function is switched off (/ page 153).
Driving in mountainous terrain Also observe the following information when driving in mountainous terrain: R Observe the values of the approach/depar
ture angle and of the maximum gradient (/ page 348). R Avoid high engine speeds.
R Use the braking power of the engine when driving downhill. R Shift to a lower gear on uphill gradients and
on long, steep downhill gradients. R Activate DSR before driving downhill, if nec
essary (/ page 183).
Checklist after driving off-road Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalan ces and therefore vibrations. R If theF drive program is selected: select
another drive program. R Deactivate DSR. R Apply the brakes to dry them after fording. R Check that the service brake is working nor
mally after a long downhill stretch. R Clean the following components every time
after driving off-road: — license plate number
— headlamps and tail lamps — tires, wheels and wheel arches — underbody R After driving through sand, mud, water or
gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned: — brake discs and brakepads — tires and wheels — axle joints
ECO start/stop function
Operation of the ECO start/stop function Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. % The ECO start/stop function is available only
in theC,A,; and= drive pro grams (depending on the setting).
152 Driving and parking
If all vehicle-related conditions for an automatic engine stop are met, the engine is switched off automatically: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans mission positionh ori. R You activate the HOLD function or engage
transmission positionj.
% If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. When the HOLD function is active and in transmission positionj, the engine can stop in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.
The engine is restarted automatically if: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
You shift into transmission positionh or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic engine start is required by the
vehicle.
ECO start/stop function symbols in the multi function display: R The symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the nor symbol appears
when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelli gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R Thes symbol appears: the ECO start/
stop function is deactivated or there is a mal function.
If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting display message appears in the multifunction display. If you do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is auto matically switched off after three minutes.
Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function
# Press button1. A display appears in the instrument cluster when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on.
% A continuous display appears in the instrument cluster while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.
Driving and parking 153
ECO display function
The ECO display summarizes your driving char acteristics from the start of the journey to its completion and assists you in achieving the most economical driving style. You can influence consumption by doing the fol lowing: R Drive with particular care R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Drive in drive program;. R Follow the gearshift recommendations
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly, the outer edge will light up and the segment will fill up when the following driving style is adop ted: R 1 Steady speed R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling R 3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be gray, the outer edge will be dark and the segment will empty when the following driving style is adop ted: R 1 Fluctuations in speed R 2 Heavy braking R 3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have driven economically: R The three segments will fill up completely at
the same time R The edges around all three segments will
light up
The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style in comparison with a driver with a very sporty driving style will be shown in the center of display4. The range displayed does not indicate a fixed reduction in consumption.
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. % Depending on the engine and equipment,
the vehicle has different drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change between the following drive programs: = (Individual): individual settings C (Sport): sporty driving style A (Comfort): comfortable and economical
driving style ; (Eco): particularly economical driving
style (vehicles with automatic transmis sion)
154 Driving and parking
F (Offroad): driving on less demanding off- road terrain
% The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display of the on-board com puter.
Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive
— Engine and transmission management — Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R ESP
R Vehicles with adaptive damping adjust ment: suspension R Electric power steering
Notes on the roof load display
Certain drive programs and ESP settings are unsuitable for transporting a roof load. If one of these drive programs is set or selected,
the symbol is shown as a warning. When
this symbol is shown, the selected drive program is not suitable for transporting a load on the roof. The following drive programs are affected: R Sport drive program R Individual drive program with the Sport
ESP setting
% The symbol is also shown in the following sit uations: R Within the themes if a corresponding
drive program is saved For more information on themes see . R Within the reset display if the previously
active drive program is unsuitable for the transport of a roof load For further information on the reset dis play, see (/ page 156).
Selecting the drive program
% Depending on the equipment, the vehicle is equipped with either a switch or a button.
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch1 forwards or backwards. The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking 155
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button2. The DYNAMIC SELECT menu appears in the multifunction display.
# Press DYNAMIC SELECT button2 again. The chosen drive program appears.
Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system)
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I # Select Individual Configuration. # Select and set a category.
Switching the restoration display on or off # Switch Request at Start on or off.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. % The prompt appears only if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard settings.
Function off: the next time the vehicle is star ted theA drive program is set automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is activated auto matically. % This function must be activated for each user
profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and Eco start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.
156 Driving and parking
% The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Factors that can influence this are, for exam ple: R Sea level R Fuel grade R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine
% The values displayed serve only as orienta tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown in the media display may deviate from the actual values.
Calling up the consumption indicator
Multimedia system: 4 5 Info # Select Consumption.
The current and average consumption is dis played.
Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect gearshifting
If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi tionh ork, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position
h ork when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Driving and parking 157
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is displayed in the multifunction display.
j Park position k Reverse gear
i Neutral h Drive position
Engaging reverse gear R # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutrali even if the ignition is switched off or the driver’s door is opened: # Start the vehicle. # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the car is stationary. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch the ignition off.
% If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans mission remains in neutrali.
Engaging park position P # Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 164). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle is
stationary. # When the vehicle is stationary, press button
j. When the transmission position display showsj, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position displayj appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
% Depending on the situation, it may take a short time untilj is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.
158 Driving and parking
Park positionj is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R you switch off the ignition when the vehicle
is stationary and the transmission is in posi tionh ork. R you open the driver’s door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission is in positionh ork.
% To maneuver with an open driver’s door, open the driver’s door while stationary and engage transmission positionh ork again.
% At very low outside temperatures below approx. -4 F (-20 C), you may not be able to shift the transmission fromj to another transmission position when the engine is switched off. If this is the case, only change the transmission position while the engine is running.
Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the
DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis sion positionh, it shifts the gears automati cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The driving speed
Problems with the transmission
The transmission has a faulty gear shift Possible cause: R The transmission is losing oil.
# Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration characteristics get worse, and the transmission no longer shifts. Possible cause: R The transmission is in emergency operation
mode.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traf fic conditions.
# Shift the transmission to positionj. # Switch off the engine. # Wait at least ten seconds. # Start the engine again. # Shift the transmission to positionh. # Have the transmission checked at a qualified
specialist workshop immediately.
Manual gearshifting
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers.
Driving and parking 159
When the automatic transmission is shifted to positionh, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting
The gears shift automatically when manual gear shifting is deactivated. Temporary setting:
# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle1 or2. Manual gearshifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display showsp and the current gear.
% How long the manual gearshifting stays acti vated depends on various factors. Manual gearshifting can be automatically deactivated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission positionh is
engaged again R Driving style
# To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2.
# To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle1. If you pull and hold the steering wheel gear shift paddle1, the transmission shifts to the lowest possible gear.
# To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display showsh.
Permanent setting: # Change to drive program=(/ page 155). # Select drive settingp (/ page 156).
Gearshift recommendation
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.
160 Driving and parking
# If gearshift recommendation1 appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.
Using kickdown
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel
erator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached to protect the engine from overrevving.
Glide mode function
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position displayh is
shown in green.
Glide mode is activated if the following condi tions are met: R Drive program; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road’s course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
% Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the «Eco» setting for the drive in the drive program=.
Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: when Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the glide mode function is not available. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation
% Glide mode can be ended by pressing a steering wheel gearshift paddle (/ page 159).
Driving and parking 161
Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe cially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.
Refueling Refueling the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
& WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.
162 Driving and parking
# To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi cles with a gasoline engine
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch the ignition on. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
drained completely.
* NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused by overfilled fuel tanks
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
If you have added too much fuel because of a defective filling pump, for instance: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle
# Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked.
% Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again.
Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel.
Driving and parking 163
Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased.
1 Fuel filler flap 2 Bracket for fuel filler cap 3 Fuel type
4 Tire pressure table 5 QR code for rescue card
# Press on the back area of fuel filler flap1. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and
remove it. # Insert the fuel filler cap from above into
bracket2. # Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches off. # Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly. # Close fuel filler flap1. % Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
Parking Parking the vehicle
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi cle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Apply the parking brake. # Switch the transmission to positionj.
& WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable
material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
164 Driving and parking
# In particular, do not park on dry grass land or harvested grain fields.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away
# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away.
# Bring the vehicle to a standstill by applying the brake pedal.
# On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.
# Apply the electric parking brake. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Engage transmission positionj in a station
Driving and parking 165
ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 158).
# Switch off the engine and the ignition by pressing button1.
# Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still
operate the side windows and the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel for approx imately five minutes if the driver’s door is closed.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door opener
& DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.
# Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti lation.
& WARNING Risk of injury when opening or closing a door with the garage door opener
When you operate or program the door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the door may become trapped or be struck by the door. # Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of movement of the door.
Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea
ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S.
safety standards Requirements:
R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
% The garage door opener function is always available when the ignition is switched on.
166 Driving and parking
# Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)
# Press and hold button1,2 or3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp4 flashes yellow.
% It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi cator lamp flashes yellow.
# Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp4 continues to flash yellow.
# Point remote control5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1,2 or3.
# Press and hold button6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp4 lights up green contin
uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp4 flashes green. Pro
gramming was successful. Additionally,
synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must also be carried out.
# If indicator lamp4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.
# Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the
garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects
are located outside the range of movement of the door.
# Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.
# Press previously programmed button1,2 or3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com pleted.
% Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.
Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control5. # Hold remote control5 at various angles
from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
# Hold remote control5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every posi tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
# Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button6 on
Driving and parking 167
remote control5 again before transmission ends.
# Align the antenna line of the door opener unit with the remote control.
% Support and additional information on pro gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink Hotline on
1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https://
www.homelink.com/mercedes
Opening or closing the garage door Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
# Press and hold buttons1,2 or3 until the door opens or closes.
# If indicator lamp4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons1 and3.
Indicator lamp4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp4 flashes green: release
buttons1 and3. The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake
Electric parking brake function (applying automatically)
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi cle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf
fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. R Change the transmission position. R Start the vehicle.
# Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
# When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
# Keep the SmartKey out of reach of chil dren.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans mission is in positionj and one of the follow ing conditions is fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver’s seat and the driver’s door is opened.
% To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake.
168 Driving and parking
In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta
tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
This is the case if one of the following conditions is also fulfilled: R The engine is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver’s seat and the driver’s door is opened. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp appears in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
Electric parking brake function (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver’s door is closed. R The engine is running. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in positionh ork and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission positionj toh or k when on level ground with the driver’s door closed. R If the transmission is in positionk, the tail
gate must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver’s seat.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver’s seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: R You shift from transmission positionj. R You have previously driven at speeds greater
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
When the electric parking brake is released, the redF (USA) or! (Canada) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Driving and parking 169
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually
Applying
# Push handle1. The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp appears in the instrument cluster.
% The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the indicator lamp is lit continu ously.
Releasing # Switch on the ignition. # Pull handle1.
The redF (USA) or! (Canada) indica tor lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Emergency braking # Press and hold handle1.
As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The redF (USA) or! (Can ada) indicator lamp appears in the instru ment cluster.
Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle
If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will
receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch on the ignition. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged. R The force of the impact.
The following situations can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, e.g. in a two-
story garage.
% Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated.
% If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili tate the next engine start.
170 Driving and parking
System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, e.g.
if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied
Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Standby mode (extension of the starter bat tery’s period out of use)
Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimised during extended periods of non-oper ation. Standby mode is characterised by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears
in the media display. R The connection to online services is interrup
ted. R The ATA (anti-theft alarm system) is not avail
able. R The interior motion sensor and tow-away
alarm functions are not available. R The function for detecting collisions on a
parked vehicle is not available.
If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The engine is switched off. R The ignition is switched on.
Exceeding the vehicle’s displayed non-opera tional time may cause inconvenience, i.e. it can not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the engine. The starter battery must be charged first in the following situations: R The vehicle’s non-operational time must be
extended. R The Battery Charge Insufficient for Standby
Mode message appears in the media display.
% Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (park ing the vehicle for an extended period) Requirements: R The engine is switched off.
Driving and parking 171
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Vehicle # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. # Select Yes.
Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always
take into account road, weather or traffic condi tions.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
1 Cameras in the outside mirrors 2 Multifunction camera 3 Front camera
4 Ultrasonic sensors 5 Rear view camera
% Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, the radar sensors are integrated behind the bumpers and/or behind the radiator grill.
Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. Keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 280). The cam eras and sensors must not be covered, for exam ple by bicycle racks, overhanging loads, stickers, foil or foils to protect against stone chipping. Additional license plate brackets can impair the function of the ultrasonic sensors, in particular. In the event of damage or a severe impact in the area of the sensors, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist work shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. If the sensors or cameras are dam aged, some driving systems and driving safety systems may no longer function properly.
172 Driving and parking
Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems
R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 173) R Off-road ABS (/ page 174) R BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 174) R ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 174) R ESP Crosswind Assist (/ page 176) R EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 176) R STEER CONTROL (/ page 176) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 177)1
R Cruise control (/ page 182) R DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
(/ page 183) R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 185)1
R Active Speed Limit Assist (/ page 189)2
R Route-based speed adaptation (/ page 190)2
R Active Steering Assist (/ page 191)2
R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 193)2
R Active Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 195)2
R Hill Start Assist (/ page 196) R HOLD function (/ page 196) R Start-off assist (/ page 197) R Suspension with adaptive damping adjust
ment (/ page 198) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 198) R Rear view camera (/ page 203) R Surround view camera (/ page 205) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 208) R ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 213) R Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 215)1
R Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 217)1
R Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 219)3
Function of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, e.g. at full brake application
or insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
1 This function includes subfunctions which are only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. 2 This function is country-dependent and only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package. 3 This function includes subfunctions which are only available in conjunction with the Driving Assistance Package or only available depending on the country.
Driving and parking 173
Functions of Off-road ABS
% Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select theF drive program.
Off-road ABS is specially adapted for driving off- road: R The front wheels lock cyclically during brak
ing. R The braking distance is shortened due to the
digging-in effect.
System limits R Off-road ABS functions at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h). R If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer
may be restricted.
Function of BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres
sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ESP
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is deactivated
If you deactivate ESP, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) can monitor and improve driving stability and trac tion in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on a wet or slippery road. R When braking.
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to
the situation.
ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
% When ESP is deactivated, you are still assis ted by ESP when braking.
174 Driving and parking
If the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, one or several vehicle wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
is necessary when pulling away.
It can be advantageous to deactivate ESP in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel.
% Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction.
If the ESP warning lamp lights up continu ously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Indicator and warning lamps (/ page 398) R Display messages (/ page 350)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. If you select theF drive program, a special ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is automatically activated. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle’s traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if
they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
ESP modes Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP mode will be activated auto matically. ESP adapts to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver’s preferred driving style. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 155).
ESP Comfort R active in drive programsA and;
R balance between traction and stability R recommended for all road surface conditions R suitable for both dry and difficult road condi
tions, such as snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain
ESP Sport R active in drive programC R continues to offer stability but with a sporty
setup R allows the sporty driver a more active driving
style R only suitable for good road conditions, a dry
road surface and a clear stretch of road
Off-road ESP R active in drive programF R intervenes later if there is oversteering or
understeering, thus improving traction R suitable for easily negotiable off-road terrain
such as dirt tracks, gravel or sandy surfaces
Driving and parking 175
Activating/deactivating ESP (Electronic Sta bility Program)
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access % ESP can only be activated/deactivated
using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.
# Select ESP. # Select On or Off.
ESP is deactivated if the ESP OFF warn ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument cluster. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.
Function of ESP Crosswind Assist
ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi cle in the lane: R ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ
ual brake application on one side.
Function of EBD
Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking,
especially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given particu larly in the following situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. R The vehicle starts to skid.
System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP is deactivated. R ESP is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.
176 Driving and parking
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack
age: Evasive Steering Assist and cornering function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians, or reduce the effects of such a colli sion. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli sion, a warning tone sounds and theL dis tance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur simultaneously with the braking applica tion. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max imum full-stop braking if necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172).
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, display1 appears in the multifunction display and then automatically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE) may also be initiated.
Driving and parking 177
& WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa tions. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in various speed ranges: The distance warning function can issue a warn ing in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your
vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and theL distance warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten sioning of the seat belt.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation allows this.
Distance warning function (vehicles without Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles, moving pedestrians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) when approaching crossing cyclists
Distance warning function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead
178 Driving and parking
R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with out Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 124 mph
(200 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead
R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists R at speeds up to approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph
(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 43 mph
(70 km/h) when approaching stationary and
moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack age) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi cles and vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) when approaching moving pedes trians and crossing cyclists
Driving and parking 179
Situation-dependent braking assistance (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) The situation-dependent braking assistance can intervene from a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: R at speeds up to approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead R at speeds up to approximately 62 mph
(100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles R at speeds up to approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead R at speeds up to approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) when approaching stationary and moving pedestrians, crossing vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Activating kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R There is no longer a risk of collision. R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle.
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac teristics: R The ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle. R Reaction from a speed of approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx imately 43 mph (70 km/h).
You can prevent the assistance at any time by actively steering.
Cornering function (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) If a danger of collision from an oncoming vehicle is detected when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds below 9 mph (15 km/h) before you have left the lane in which you are driving.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva sive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec essary.
180 Driving and parking
# End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
# Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.
System limits Full system performance is not available for a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after driving off. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered. R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer
ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed. R If DSR is active.
R In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. R If pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
the sensor detection range. R If pedestrians are hidden by other objects. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot
be distinguished from the background. R If a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects. R On curves with a tight radius.
% The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in period.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting.
The setting is retained when the engine is next started.
Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off.
The distance warning function, the autono mous braking function and the Evasive Steer ing Assist are deactivated. When the vehicle is next started, the middle setting is automatically selected.
% If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display.
Driving and parking 181
Speed control cruise control
Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. Cruise control is operated using the correspond ing steering wheel buttons. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maxi mum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172).
Displays on the multifunction display Rh (gray): cruise control is selected but
not yet active, or temporarily passive. Rh (green): cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears along with theh dis play.
% The segments between the stored speed and the end of the segment display light up in the speedometer.
System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. R If you are driving when visibility is poor.
Operating cruise control
& WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements: R ESP must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph
(20 km/h). R The transmission is in positionh.
182 Driving and parking
Operating cruise control # Press the rocker switch on the steering
wheel control panel up or down to the desired position.
Activating cruise control # SelectM with the right rocker switch.
Activating cruise control
# Press rocker switch1 upM or down N. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.
or # SelectJ with the left rocker switch.
The last stored speed is called up and main tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
% When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is cleared.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.
or # 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.
or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed
and press rocker switch1 upM. Adopting a detected speed
# Activate cruise control or the variable limiter. # If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis
played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.
Deactivating cruise control # SelectO with the left rocker switch.
Deactivating cruise control # SelectN with the right rocker switch. % If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP
intervenes, cruise control is deactivated.
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
Function of DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR braking effect on the vehi cle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradi
Driving and parking 183
ents, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. When DSR is activated and the transmission is in positionh,k ori, DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 1 mph (2 km/h) and 11 mph (18 km/h). By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive at speeds greater than 28 mph (45 km/h) or select drive programC. The Off message then appears in the multifunction display. The status indicator in the multifunction display dis appears. You also hear a warning tone.
Notes on DSR
& WARNING Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces
If the driven speed and the target speed dif fer, the wheels may lose traction. # Take into account the road surface and
the difference between the driving
speed and target speed before activat ing DSR.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172). You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the down hill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tires, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required.
Activating or deactivating DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Requirements: R You are driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or
slower. If the current vehicle speed is too high, the Max. Speed 24 mph message appears in the multifunction display. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti
vated.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select.
A status display appears in the multifunction display when the function is activated.
Changing the target speed
184 Driving and parking
# To increase/reduce the target speed: press rocker switch1 upM or down N to the point of resistance. The selected target speed increases or decreases by 1 mph (1 km/h) and appears along with the symbol in the multifunc tion display.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack
age: 15 mph (20 km/h) — 120 mph (200 km/h)
R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack age: 15 mph (20 km/h) — 130 mph (210 km/h)
Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel efficient, com fortable or dynamic) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if
the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack
age: — Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)
— Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country- dependent)
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv ing Assistance Package: if the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on multi-lane, sepa
rate roadways by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically follow the vehi cle in front, driving off again within 30 seconds. If a critical situation is detected when driving off, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehi cle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172).
Driving and parking 185
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC displays in the instrument cluster
Assistance graphic 1 Route-based speed adaptation: type of route
event (/ page 190) 2 Vehicle in front 3 Distance indicator 4 Set specified distance 5 Active Lane Change Assist lane change dis
play
Permanent status display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Rk (white): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set Rk (green): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected Rr: Route-based speed adaptation active
(/ page 190).
The stored speed is shown along with the per manent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the speed is grayed out. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the
green vehicle symbol is displayed cycli cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
% If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas sive mode. The Suspendedmessage appears in the multifunction display.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC display in the speedometer The stored speed is highlighted on the speedom eter. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. Deactivation of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, as well as altera tions to the speed due to manual or automatic adoption of the maximum permissible speed, are displayed in the control feedback of the multi function display on a single line.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is
glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If there is swirling dust, e.g. when driving off-
road or on sandy surfaces. R The windshield in the area of the camera is
dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
186 Driving and parking
R In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident from acceler ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis
tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is
considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
# Always carefully observe the traffic con ditions and be ready to brake at all times.
# Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita
ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
& WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when
changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles R to complex traffic conditions R to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in positionh.
Driving and parking 187
R The driver’s door is closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not being
used to park the vehicle or to exit from a parking space. R DSR is deactivated.
# To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the rocker switch on the steering wheel control unit up or down to the desired position.
Activating/deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press theH button.
Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # To activate without a stored speed: press
rocker switch1 upM or downN, or selectJ with the left rocker switch.
or # To activate with a stored speed: select J with the left rocker switch.
# Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle.
Adopting a detected speed limit # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
# If a traffic sign has been detected and is dis played in the instrument cluster: selectJ with the left rocker switch. The maximum permissible speed on the traf fic sign is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # SelectJ with the left rocker switch. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and
firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
188 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver’s seat
If you leave the driver’s seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver’s seat.
# SelectO with the left rocker switch.
% If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
Increasing or decreasing the speed # 1 mph (1 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN to the pressure point.
or
# 5 mph (10 km/h): press rocker switch1 up M or downN beyond the pressure point.
or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed
and press rocker switch1 upM. Changing the specified distance to the vehi cle in front # To reduce the specified distance: press
the right rocker switch up (). # To increase the specified distance: press
the right rocker switch down ().
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
If speed limit change between 12 mph (20 km/h) and 80 mph (130 km/h) is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is active, it will be automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 216). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed
permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the Instrument Display is always upda ted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited stretch of road (e.g. on a freeway), the recom mended speed is automatically adopted as the stored speed. The system uses the speed stored on an unlimited stretch of road as the recom mended speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on an unlimited stretch of road, the rec ommended speed is 80 mph (130 km/h). If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172).
System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 215). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g.
Driving and parking 189
for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle’s speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R in wet conditions or in fog R when towing a trailer
# Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
# Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be config ured in the multimedia system (/ page 191). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R T-intersections, roundabouts and toll stations R Turns and exits R Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic )
% When the toll station is reached, Active Dis tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi cator to change lanes is switched on and one of the following situations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand still. When route guidance is active, the first speed adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn signal indicator is switched on, the selected route is confirmed and further speed adjustment is activated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off
before the route event.
190 Driving and parking
R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.
System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable: R unclear roads R road narrowing R wet road surfaces, snow or ice
In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol lowing situations:
R If the driver does not follow the calcula ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
# Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.
Setting route-based speed adaptation
Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Route-based Speed # Activate or deactivate the function.
When the function is active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.
% Further information on the route-based speed adaptation (/ page 190).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer ence.
Driving and parking 191
% Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving outside the center of the lane, for example to form a res cue lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.
Status display of Active Steering Assist in the multifunction display R (gray): activated and passive R (green): activated and active R (red): system limits detected R (white, red hands): «hands on the steer
ing wheel» prompt
% During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray in the multifunction display.
% Depending on the selected vehicle settings, Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Steering and touch detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, a warning tone
sounds in addition to the visual warning mes sage. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initi ated (/ page 195). The warning is not issued or is stopped when the driver gives confirmation to the system: R The driver steers the vehicle. R The driver presses a steering wheel button or
operates Touch Control.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172).
System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane or to drive through exits.
192 Driving and parking
The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are
present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. R The lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R The road is narrow and winding. R There are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, such as object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When the tire pressure is too low.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten
tion to traffic conditions.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements: R ESP is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Selecta Steering Assist.
Function of Active Lane Change Assist
Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque if the driver operates a turn signal indicator.
Driving and parking 193
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172). Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all the following conditions are met: R You are driving on a freeway or road with
multiple lanes in the direction of travel. R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro
ken lane marking. R No vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane. R The driven speed is between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R Active Lane Change Assist is switched on in
the multimedia system. R Active Steering Assist is activated and active.
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has activated the turn sig nal indicator. This is shown to the driver with a green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. The Lane Change to the Leftmessage, for example, also appears. If Active Lane Change Assist has been activated with the turn signal
indicator but a lane change is not immediately possible, a gray arrow appears next to the steering wheel symbol, which remains green. When the lane change assistance starts, the turn signal indicator is automatically activated along with the display in the multifunction display. If the assistance graphic is shown when chang ing lanes, the lane change display appears with an additional arrow pointing towards the adja cent lane (/ page 185) If a lane change is not possible, the arrow is faded out after a few seconds and a new lane change must be initiated. An immediate lane change is only possible on freeway sections without speed limits. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change Assist may be canceled. The Lane Change Can- celed message appears in the multifunction dis play. In addition, a warning tone may sound.
& WARNING Risk of accident when chang ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane
Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that
the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.
# Monitor the lane change.
& WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func tioning
If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torques. # Always monitor the lane change and
keep your hands on the steering wheel.
194 Driving and parking
Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.
System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 191). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors in the rear bumper are dirty,
damaged or covered by a sticker or ice and snow, for example. R The exterior lighting shows a defect.
% The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process; no arrow appears next to the Active Steering Assist symbol when the turn signal indicator is activated.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Change Assist
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Change Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer ing wheel, display1 appears in the multifunc tion display. If the driver still does not steer the
vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver still does not respond to the warn ing, the Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the multifunction display. If the driver still does not respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in stages to a standstill. Depending on the country, at speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h) the hazard warning lights switch on automatically. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park
ing brake. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering
Driving and parking 195
R Braking or accelerating R Deactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol lowing conditions: R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in positionh ork. R The electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away
After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not
leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.
HOLD function
HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.
System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being activated when you leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or
in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
# Always secure the vehicle against roll ing away before you leave it.
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver’s door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver’s side is fastened. R The engine is running or has been automati
cally switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
196 Driving and parking
R The electric parking brake is released. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti
vated. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is in positionh,k ori.
Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal and after a short
time quickly depress further until the display appears in the multifunction display.
# Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the dis
play disappears from the multifunction dis play.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa
ted. R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The transmission is switched to positionj.
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission positionj and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver’s
door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a malfunction in the system or the
power supply is insufficient.
Start-off assist
Function of the start-off assist The start-off assist enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, the tires and vehicle must also be in good condition. Do not activate the start-off assist on public roads. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa tion on ESP (/ page 174).
Activating the start-off assist
& WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning
When you use start-off assist, individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle.
If ESP is deactivated, there is a risk of skid ding and accident! # Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
# Deactivating ESP (/ page 176). # Move the steering wheel to the straight-
ahead position. # Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left
foot and keep it depressed. # Engage theh drive position (/ page 159). # Select the sportiest available drive program B orC(/ page 155).
# Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
Driving and parking 197
# Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera tion.
# Switch on ESP once the acceleration proce dure is complete. ESP will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Canceling the start-off assist # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP.
Function of adaptive damping adjustment
Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment continuously adjusts the characteristics of the suspension dampers to the current operating and driving conditions. The damping is set individually for each wheel and is affected by the following factors: R the road surface conditions R vehicle load R the drive program selected
R the driving style
The drive program can be adjusted using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system with ultrasound. It monitors the area around your vehicle using mul tiple sensors on the front bumper and on the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC shows you the distance between your vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. In the standard setting, an intermittent warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle in front and approx
imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) to an obstacle behind. A continuous warning tone sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft (0.2 m). Using the Warn Early All Around setting in the multimedia sys tem, the warning tones for front and side impact protection can be set to sound at a greater dis tance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides (/ page 202). % The Warn Early All Around setting is always
active at the rear of the vehicle. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Active Parking Assist is unavailable.
198 Driving and parking
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the multimedia system
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without a surround view camera
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and a sur round view camera
If Active Parking Assist is deactivated and an obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds below 6 mph (10 km/h). The color of the individual segments of the warn ing display is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short
distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less
Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC in the Head-up Display
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front2 and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) on the sides3 can also be displayed in the Head- up Display.
Driving and parking 199
System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g.
persons, animals or objects. R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Otherwise, they may not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, especially after driv ing off-road, taking care not to scratch or dam age them.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Example: vehicles with surround view camera
When rear segments1 or all-round segments 2 light up red and the symbol appears in the multifunction display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.
If a warning tone also sounds for approximately two seconds every time the vehicle is started, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors
and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 280). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been
deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Function of the passive side impact protec tion Passive side impact protection is an additional Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which warns the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles are detected between the front and rear detec tion range. In order for an object on the side to be detected, the sensors in the front and rear bumper must first detect the object while you are driving past it. During the parking procedure or when maneu vering, objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of a detected
200 Driving and parking
obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued and the segments light up in color in the display. The segment color changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Yellow: approximately 1.0 — 2.0 ft
(30 — 60 cm) R Red: less than approximately 1.0 ft (30 cm)
In order for lateral front or rear segments to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis played.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles without a surround view camera
1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacle detected at the front right (yellow)
and rear (red)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display: vehicles with a surround view camera
1 Operational front and rear 2 Operational front, rear and sides 3 Obstacles detected at the front right (red)
Saved obstacles on the sides are deleted in the following situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch off the igni
tion. R You open the doors.
After the engine is restarted, obstacles on the sides must be detected again before a new warning can be issued.
Driving and parking 201
System limits The system limits for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply to passive side impact pro tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam ple: R Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from
the side R Objects placed next to the vehicle
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
* NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi
cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth erwise be damaged.
Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window
appears.
% Make sure that there are no persons, ani mals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces.
# Tap in the media display. % If the symbol is shown in the multifunc
tion display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.
Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.
Adjusting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking
Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Volume. # Set a value.
Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select Warning Tone Pitch. # Set a value.
Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence when the vehicle is further away from an obsta cle. # Select Warn Early All Around. # Activate or deactivate the function.
202 Driving and parking
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout You can specify whether the volume of a media source in the multimedia system is to be reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sounds a warning tone. # Select Audio Fadeout During Warning Tones. # Activate or deactivate the function.
Reversing camera
Function of the rear view camera When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is shown in the media dis play. Dynamic guide lines show the path the vehicle will take with the current steering angle. This helps you to orient yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing up. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing.
% You can open the cover of the rear view cam era manually (/ page 208).
The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances dis played only apply to road level. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select from the following views: R Normal view R Wide-angle view
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror.
Vehicles without Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur
face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area
3 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
4 Bumper 5 Red guide line at a distance of approximately
1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
Driving and parking 203
Wide-angle view
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist The following camera views are available in the multimedia system:
Normal view 1 Yellow lanes marking the course the tires
will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4 Yellow warning indicator of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less)
6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m))
Wide-angle view
System failure If the rear view camera is not operational, the following display appears in the multimedia sys tem.
204 Driving and parking
System limits The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 172).
% Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situation. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
% The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
360 camera
Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con sists of four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibility. The views of the surround view camera are always available when driving forwards up to a speed of approx. 10 mph (16 km/h) and when backing up. The surround view camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surround ings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park ing.
The system evaluates images from the following cameras: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors
% You can open the cover of the rear view cam era manually (/ page 208).
Views of the surround view camera You can select from different views:
1 Wide-angle view, front 2 Top view with image from the front camera
Driving and parking 205
3 Top view with images from the side cameras in the outside mirrors
4 Wide-angle view, rear 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam
era 6 Top view with trailer view (vehicles with a
trailer hitch)
Top view
1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering wheel angle
2 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
3 Your vehicle from above
The color of the individual segments of warning display2 is based on the distance to the detec ted obstacle: R Yellow segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and 3.3 ft (1.0 m) R Orange segments: obstacles at a distance
between approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m) R Red segments: obstacles at a very short
distance of approx. 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational and no object is detected, the segments of the warning display are shown in gray.
Guide lines
1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic)
3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 in (0.3 m) from the rear area
4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m)
% When Active Parking Assist is active, lane markings1 are displayed in green.
206 Driving and parking
The guide lines in the media display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances apply to road level.
Side view of the mirror cameras The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view.
1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions with outside mirrors folded out
2 Marker of the wheel contact points
System failure If the system is not ready for operation, the fol lowing message appears in the media display:
System limits The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa tions: R The doors are open. R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The tailgate is open. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at
night. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which
the cameras are installed, are damaged, dirty or covered. Observe the information on vehi cle sensors and cameras (/ page 172).
% Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.
For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. % The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
% Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.
See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 280).
Selecting a view for the surround view cam era # Shift to reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia
system (/ page 205). # If, after shifting to reverse gear, the image of
the rear view camera is not shown: switch off the ignition, press and hold thec button, switch on the ignition and engage reverse gear again.
Driving and parking 207
Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after
some time or after an ignition cycle.
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system that automatically searches for and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle when traveling forwards up to approx. 22 mph (35 km/h). Vehicles with automatic transmission: Active Parking Assist provides assistance when chang ing gear, accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle. If all requirements are met, the display appears in the multifunction display. The system then independently locates and measures paral
lel and perpendicular parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. When Active Parking Assist has detected parking spaces, the display appears in the multi function display. The arrows show on which side of the road detected parking spaces are located. They are then shown in the media display. The parking space and, if necessary, the parking direction can be selected as desired. Active Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path, switches on the turn signal indicator and assists you in parking and exiting the parking space. Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. If one of the following actions is carried out, Active Parking Assist is canceled: R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R You begin steering. R You apply the parking brake.
R Vehicles with automatic transmission: you engage transmission positionj. R ESP intervenes. R You open the doors or the tailgate while driv
ing.
System limits Objects located above or below the detection range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calcu lating the parking procedure. In some circum stances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space incorrectly.
208 Driving and parking
& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
This could cause a collision. # In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Extreme environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain. R When transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle. R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or
uphill gradient. R When snow chains are installed. R Directly after a tire change or when spare
tires are installed. R If the tire pressure is too low or too high. R If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g.
after bottoming out on a curb. R On steep inclines of more than approx. 15%.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking spaces that are not suitable for parking, such as, e.g.: R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Parking with Active Parking Assist % Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, the
button may also be located at a different position in the center console.
# Press button1.
Driving and parking 209
The media display shows the view of Active Park ing Assist. Area2 displays detected parking spaces4 and vehicle path3. % Vehicle path3 shown on the media display
may differ from the actual vehicle path. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi
cle. # Select desired parking space4 and con
firm. # If necessary, select the parking direction: for
wards or reverse, and confirm. Vehicle path3 is shown, depending on selected parking space4 and the parking direction.
% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the parking procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please Engage Reverse Gear message appears in the media display:
select the corresponding transmission posi tion. Vehicles with automatic transmission: The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
% During the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist, the lane markings are dis played in green in the camera image.
On completion of the parking procedure, the Parking Assist Finished, Take Control of Vehicle display message appears. Further maneuvering may still be necessary. # After completion of the parking procedure,
safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
% You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa ble, the system can change the transmission position again or cancel the parking proce dure.
210 Driving and parking
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked with Active
Parking Assist.
Please note that you are responsible for the vehi cle and surroundings during the entire parking procedure. # Start the vehicle.
# Press button1. The media display shows the view of Active Parking Assist.
# If the vehicle has been parked perpendicular to the direction of travel: in area2, select direction of travel3 Left or Right.
% The vehicle path shown on the media display may differ from the actual vehicle path.
# Confirm direction of exit3 to drive out of the parking space.
% The turn signal indicator is switched on auto matically when the exiting procedure begins.
You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic condi tions. If necessary, select the turn signal indica tor accordingly.
Driving and parking 211
& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road
users. # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.
# If, for example, the Please Engage Forward Gear message appears in the media display: select the corresponding transmission posi tion. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched off auto matically.
After the parking space has been exited, a warn ing tone and the Parking Assist Finished,
Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not automatically braked and can roll away. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.
Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle’s speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in the media display. % You can cancel an intervention by Drive
Away Assist at any time by pressing the button.
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden tify objects and traffic situations.
# Always pay careful attention to the traf fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
# Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva sive action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and
brake pedals. R If an incorrect transmission position is
engaged.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
212 Driving and parking
R If you shift the transmission position tok or h when the vehicle is stationary. R If the detected obstacle is less than approx.
3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. R If the maneuvering assistant function is acti
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited on inclines. % Also observe the system limits of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 198).
Function of Cross Traffic Alert % Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 217).
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist: Cross Traffic Alert can warn drivers of any crossing traffic when backing up and maneuvering out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a critical situation is detected, theL symbol appears in the media display. If the driver does not respond to
the warning, the vehicle’s brakes can be applied automatically. If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. Cross Traffic Alert is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. R If the maneuvering assistant function is acti
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits Cross Traffic Alert is not available on inclines.
Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis tance Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera & Parking # Switch Maneuvering Assistance on or off. % Maneuvering assistance must be active for
the function of Drive Away Assist (/ page 212) and Cross Traffic Alert (/ page 213).
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well- rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The
driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap ted accordingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the Instrument Dis play. You can acknowledge the message and
Driving and parking 213
take a break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.
You can have the following status information for ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance menu of the on-board computer: R The length of the journey since the last
break. R The attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST: — the fuller the circle, the higher the atten
tional level determined
— as your attention wanes, the circle in the center of the display becomes smaller
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga tion to this rest area. This function can be activa ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the Instrument Display when the engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations: R If you have been driving for less than approx
imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road
surface or potholes). R If there is a strong side wind. R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor
nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. R If the time has been set incorrectly. R If you change lanes and vary your speed fre
quently In active driving situations.
The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness assessment is deleted and restarted when con tinuing the journey in the following situations: R If you switch off the engine. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver’s door (e.g. changing drivers or taking a break).
214 Driving and parking
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Attention Assist
Setting options # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Suggesting a rest area # Select Suggest Rest Area. # Activate or deactivate the function.
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or increasing lack of attention, it suggests a rest area in the vicinity.
# Select the suggested rest area. You are guided to the selected rest area.
Traffic Sign Assist
Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera (/ page 172). It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the instrument cluster
and optionally in the Head-up Display or central display. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172). Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data stored in the navigation system, it can update the display in the following situations without detecting traffic signs: R When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. free
way entry or exit road. R When a village or city boundary which is
stored in the digital map is passed.
The camera also detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You
can specify whether the warning is to be just a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Display in the Instrument Display
Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction
% Vehicles with a standard Instrument Dis play: a + symbol next to a traffic sign in the Instrument Display indicates that additional traffic signs have been detected. These can also be displayed in the media display and optionally in the Head-up Display.
Driving and parking 215
If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the Instrument Display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not sup ported. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. % Also observe the information on display mes
sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 350).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
direct sunlight or reflections.
R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt or snow, because they are covered, or due to insufficient lighting. R If the information in the navigation system’s
digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs
on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. R If you turn sharply, when passing traffic signs
outside the camera’s field of vision.
Setting Traffic Sign Assist Requirements: R Only vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be activated for the automatic adoption of speed limits.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating automatic adop tion of speed limits (only vehicles with Driv ing Assistance Package) # Select Limit Adoption. # Activate or deactivate the function.
The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist are automatically adopted by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
% If one of the following systems is activated, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Cruise control R Variable limiter
Further information (/ page 187).
Displaying detected traffic signs in the media display # Select Display in Central Display.
216 Driving and parking
# Activate or deactivate the function.
Adjusting the type of warning # Select Visual & Audible, Visual or Off.
Adjusting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Select Warning Threshold. # Set the desired speed.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse quently enters the monitoring range directly next to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror lights up red.
Permanent status display in the instrument clus ter: R (gray): system is activated but inopera
tive R (green): system is activated and opera
tional
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor responding direction, a double warning tone sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the turn signal indicator remains switched on, all other detected vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of the red warning lamp. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist
Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed.
Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf
fic situation and maintain a safe dis tance at the side of the vehicle.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog nize dangers (/ page 172).
Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occu pants about approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle when stationary.
& WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to vehicles approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.
Driving and parking 217
# Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear ance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant opens the door on the side with the warning, a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in the outside mirror starts to flash. This additional function is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warn ing is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up to three minutes after switching the igni tion off. The exit warning is no longer available once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi cle occupants.
System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations: R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured R in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow R if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes R if the road has very wide or narrow lanes R if vehicles are not driving in the middle of
their lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro longed time. Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse gear is engaged.
The exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R when the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces R when people approach the vehicle R in the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot Assist) If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h).
& WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.
218 Driving and parking
# Always steer, brake or accelerate your self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course- correcting brake application.
# Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis play1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro priate brake application. This brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize the dan gers (/ page 217). Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur in the following situations: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
or Active Brake Assist. R ESP is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is
detected.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance # Activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist. or # Activate or deactivate Act. Blind Spot Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc tion camera (/ page 172). It serves to protect you against unintentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned by vibration pulses in the steering wheel and guided by a course-correct ing brake application back into your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. It
Driving and parking 219
cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. The status of Active Lane Keeping Assist is dis played in the on-board computer: R (green): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active and operating. R (gray): Active Lane Keeping Assist is
active but not operating. R: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactiva
ted or there is a malfunction.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis play1 appears in the multifunction display. The system does not intervene if you activate the turn signal indicator. If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, it will intervene regardless of the turn sig nal indicator. If you leave the lane without using the turn sig nal indicator but an obstacle is detected in your lane, the system will not intervene. You are warned by vibrations in the steering wheel in the following circumstances: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking. R A front wheel drives over this lane marking.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles without Driving Assis tance Package) Lane markings were detected on both sides of the lane. The front wheel drives over a continu ous lane marking.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
Conditions for a course-correcting brake application (vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) R A continuous lane marking was detected and
driven over with the front wheel. R A lane marking and an approaching vehicle,
an overtaking vehicle or vehicles driving par allel to your vehicle were detected in the adjacent lane. The front wheel drives over the lane marking.
% A brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction.
System limits No lane-correcting brake application occurs in the following situations: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel
erate.
220 Driving and parking
R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel eration. R When ESP is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has
been detected and displayed.
If you deactivate the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning and the lane markings cannot be clearly detected, it is possible that no lane correcting brake application takes place (/ page 221). The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi
cient illumination of the road, if there are highly variable shade conditions or in rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections.
R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov
ered. R If the distance from the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack
age: if the radar sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered in snow and an obstacle is detected in your lane, no lane-correcting brake application takes place.
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Activate or deactivate the function.
Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity % The availability of this function is dependent
on the country. # Select Standard, Sensitive or Off.
Activating or deactivating the haptic warning # Select Warning.
Activate or deactivate the function.
Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy
Driving and parking 221
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can lead to damage on the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Comply with the per mitted towing methods (/ page 297) and the instructions for towing with both axles on the ground (/ page 298).
222 Driving and parking
Notes on the Instrument Display and on- board computer
& WARNING Risk of accident due to an Instrument Display malfunction
If the Instrument Display has failed or mal functioned, the function restrictions applying to safety relevant systems are not visible. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately
at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
# Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
# If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer shows only display mes sages and warnings from specific systems on the multifunction display. You must therefore ensure that your vehicle is always reliable. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 223
Instrument Display overview
1 Display content on left (example: speedome ter): speedometer/time/date/trip computer From Start and From Reset/range/audio The segments on the speedometer indicate the status of the following systems: cruise control/limiter/Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
2 Outside temperature
3 Digital speedometer 4 Time 5 Display content on right (example: tachome
ter): tachometer/average fuel consumption/ECO display/navigation/G- meter/assistant display
The fuel supply will be interrupted to protect the engine when the red mark on the tach ometer (overrevving range) is reached.
6 Index points These show the selected display or menu content.
7 Coolant temperature display
224 Instrument Display and on-board computer
The coolant temperature display is permitted to rise to 248F during normal operation. Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical sys tem: POWER and CHARGE display (electrical drive support and recuperation power of the electric motor)
8 Selected drive program 9 Selected transmission position A Multifunction display (example: standard dis
play for trip): Assistance/Telephone/Naviga tion/Trip/Media/Radio/Styles and dis plays/Service
B Fuel level, fuel filler flap location indicator, range
Overview of the buttons on the steering wheel
1P Back/Home button (press and hold), on-board computer
2 Touch Control, on-board computer 3 Control panel for cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC
4 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys tem (/ page 230) Voice Control System
5 To call up the home screen of the mul timedia system
6 Touch Control multimedia system 7 % Back button (multimedia system) 8 Brightness control to adjust the lighting in
the Instrument Display and in the control elements of the vehicle interior
Operating the on-board computer Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat ing the on-board computer.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 225
The on-board computer is operated using the left-hand Touch Control and the left-hand back/ home button. When the on-board computer is being operated, different acoustic signals will sound as operating feedback, e.g. when the end of a list is reached or when you are scrolling through a list. The following menus are available: R Assistance R Phone R Navigation R Trip R Radio
R Media R Designs & Disp. R Service
% You can find information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator’s Manual.
# To call up the menu bar: press the left-hand back button until the menu bar is displayed.
% Vehicles without Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the button to call up the menu bar of the on-board computer.
# To scroll in the menu bar: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To call up a menu, submenu or possible settings on the menu, or confirm a selec tion or setting: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To scroll through displays or lists on the menu, or select display content, a func tion, an entry or a display: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Con trol.
# To exit a submenu: press the left-hand back button.
Selecting the Head-up Display # To switch on the Head-up Display: switch
on the Head-up Display via the multimedia system or activate it in the menu bar by swip ing upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display menu has been selec ted on the Head-up Display.
# To switch to the Head-up Display: press the left-hand Touch Control or swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To select what the Head-up Display shows: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Full-screen menus Vehicles with an Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit: the following menus can be shown in full on the Instrument Display: R Assistance R Trip R Navigation
226 Instrument Display and on-board computer
# On the corresponding menu, use the left- hand Touch Control to scroll to the end of the list.
# Press the left-hand Touch Control. The selected menu will be displayed in full.
Overview of what is shown on the multi function display Also shown on the multifunction display: u Active Parking Assist (/ page 209) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 202) h Cruise control (/ page 182) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 185) Active Brake Assist (/ page 177) Active Steering Assist (/ page 191) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 219) Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 193) ECO start/stop function (/ page 152) HOLD function (/ page 196)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 128)
Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 215).
Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display
The Head-up Display projects the following infor mation above the cockpit into the driver’s field of vision: R Driving speed R Information from the navigation system R Information from the driving systems and
driving safety systems R Some warning messages
Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, different content can be shown in the three display areas of the Head-up Display (/ page 228).
Display content
1 Navigation instructions 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise
control)
System limits The visibility of the displays will be affected by the following conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light
Instrument Display and on-board computer 227
R Wet road R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses
% In extreme sunlight, sections of the display may appear washed out. You can correct this by deactivating and reactivating the Head-up Display.
Setting the Head-up Display using the on- board computer
On-board computer: 4 HEAD-UP DISPLAY The following Head-up Display settings can be selected: R Position R Brightness R Displays R Messages R Assistance status R Telephone R Audio
R Voice Control System
# To choose a setting: swipe to the right on the left-hand Touch Control. Settings menu5 will be selected.
# To call up the Settings menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To set messages, assistance status, tele phone, audio and the Voice Control Sys tem: press the left-hand Touch Control. The list of setting options will be displayed.
# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left- hand Touch Control and select a setting by pressing the left-hand Touch Control.
Selecting what the Head-up Display shows
(Example) 1 Switches the Head-up Display on/off 2 Left display area
Navigation system Average consumption G-meter
3 Central display area Set speed in the driver assistance system, e.g. cruise control Warnings from driver assistance systems, e.g. distance warning
4 Right display area
228 Instrument Display and on-board computer
Traffic Sign Assist Assistant display
5 Configuring the settings 6 Index points
Display areas2 to4 that are not required can be hidden. % In audio mode, the station name or track will
be shown temporarily when the audio source is being actively operated. In addition, the latest calls will be displayed when the tele phone list on the Instrument Display is actively operated.
# To select a display: swipe upwards or down wards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Switching the Head-up Display on/off via the multimedia system
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access # Select HUD.
The Head-up Display is activated.
Instrument Display and on-board computer 229
Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
& WARNING Risk of distraction from infor mation systems and communications equipment
If you operate information and communica tion equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system
2 Media display with touch functionality 3 Touchpad 4 Controller
Turning: adjusts the volume
Press briefly: switches the mute function on/off Press and hold: switches the multimedia sys tem or media display on or off
5 Buttons for navigation, radio/media and telephone
6 Buttons for vehicle functions/system set tings and favorites/themes
Further operating options: R Conducting a voice dialog with the Voice
Control System. R Operating functions contact-free with the
MBUX Interior Assistant.
% You can find further information about oper ation as well as about applications and serv ices in the Digital Operator’s Manual.
Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
230 MBUX multimedia system
Home screen overview
1 Depending on the display, calls up the first three applications or the home screen
2 Calls up the profile 3 Calls up the global search 4 SOS NOT READY (only when the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system is not available)
5 Signal strength of the mobile phone network, network display, battery status of the mobile phone connected, time
6 Calls up the Notifications Center 7 Calls up an application using the symbol 8 Application and current information 9 Quick-access, e.g. enter home address
A Index points and selected display area B Calls up the air conditioning menu C Calls up SUGGESTIONS, THEMES and
FAVORITES
MBUX multimedia system 231
Operating the MBUX multimedia system
Using Touch Control
1 Calls up the home screen 2 Touch Control 3G Pressing briefly: returns to the previ
ous display 4 Pressing the rocker switch down
briefly: shows favorites
Pressing the rocker switch down and holding: adds favorites and themes VOL: control adjusts the volume or switches the sound off8 (press) 6 Pressing the rocker switch up: makes or accepts a call ~ Pressing the rocker switch down: rejects or ends a call
Navigation through the menus is carried out with Touch Control2 with single-finger swipes. # To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To move the digital map: swipe in any
direction.
Using the touchscreen # Select menu options, symbols or characters
by pressing briefly. # To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left
or right. # To use handwriting to enter characters:
write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
# To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
# To call up the global menu: press and hold on the touchscreen until the OPTIONS menu appears.
Using the touchpad
1G Returns to the previous display 2~ Calls up the audio control menu
232 MBUX multimedia system
Swiping to the left of right: selects the previ ous or next radio station/music track
3 Calls up the home screen 4 Touchpad
# To select a menu option: swipe and press. # To use handwriting recognition: write a
character on the touchpad. # To open or close the Notifications Cen
ter: swipe down or up with two fingers. # To zoom in and out of the map: move two
fingers together or apart.
Calling up applications using buttons
1y Calls up vehicle functions 2z Calls up navigation 3| Calls up radio or media 4 % Calls up the telephone 5 Press briefly: calls up favorites
Press and hold: adds a favorite or theme
# Alternatively, tap on the touchscreen. or # Press the button on the Touch Control
or on the touchpad. The home screen appears.
# Call up the application (/ page 231).
Functions of the Voice Control System
With the Voice Control System, various applica tions in the MBUX multimedia system are opera ble using voice input. The Voice Control System is operational approximately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on and is available for the driver’s seat and front passenger seat. The following multimedia system applications can be operated: R Navigation R Telephone R Radio and TV R Media player R Messages R Vehicle functions
MBUX multimedia system 233
Starting the Voice Control System # Press rocker switch1 up. or # Say «Hey Mercedes».
Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant
& WARNING Risk of injury due to laser beams from the camera
This product uses a class 1 laser system If the housing is opened or damaged, invisible laser beams could damage your retina. # Do not open the housing. # Always have maintenance work and
repairs carried out by a qualified spe cialist workshop.
This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24. June 2007. The camera is located in the overhead control panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, selected functions of the multimedia system can be operated contact-free. The MBUX Interior Assistant can differentiate between driver and front passenger interactions and detects specific hand positions (poses). For further information on system limits, display messages and troubleshooting notes, see the Digital Operator’s Manual.
234 MBUX multimedia system
The MBUX Interior Assistant supports the following interactions:
Interaction area Interaction Description
In front of the media display or above the touchpad
Proximity to the control element The Interior Assistant recognizes the approach of the hand towards a con trol element. Depending on the active application, the display will be adjusted in the media display. Some functions differentiate between driver and front passenger. No specific hand position is required.
Above the center console Defined poses With defined poses a function is triggered depending on the application active.
Below the inside rearview mirror Brief up and down movements With brief vertical up and down movements below the inside rearview mir ror the reading light for the driver or the front passenger is switched on and off.
Front passenger seat Stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat
By stretching out a hand above the front passenger seat the search light is switched on. If you withdraw a hand from this area, the search light is switched off again.
Switching the reading light and search light and on or off
Requirements:
R For the reading light: the function is availa ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter
action area below the inside rearview mirror.
R For the search light: the function is availa ble when it is dark. R The hand movement takes place in the inter
action area above the front passenger seat.
MBUX multimedia system 235
R The seat belt on the front passenger seat must not be inserted in the seat belt buckle.
Switching the reading light on and off
# Briefly move a hand up or down beneath the inside rearview mirror. The reading light is switched on or off for the driver or front passenger.
Switching the search light on and off
# To switch on: reach across the front passenger seat with a hand. The search light is switched on for the driver.
# To switch off: take a hand back away from the front passenger seat. The search light is switched off again.
Information on profiles, themes, suggestions and favorites
& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver’s seat after calling up a driver profile
Selecting a profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver’s seat to the position saved under the profile. You or other vehicle occu pants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of
driver’s seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat’s range of move ment.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap ped, stop the adjustment process immedi ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the
media display. or
236 MBUX multimedia system
# b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver’s door. The adjustment process is stopped.
The driver’s seat is equipped with an access pre venter. If the driver’s door is open, the driver’s seat will not be set after calling up the driver’s profile. Profiles store your vehicle settings and settings for the multimedia system. If the vehicle is used by several drivers, the driver can select their own profile without needing to change the set tings of other drivers. % Information on profiles from Mercedes me
connect can be found in the Digital Opera tor’s Manual.
Vehicle settings are, for example, driver’s seat, steering wheel and mirror settings, climate con trol and ambient lighting. For the settings of the multimedia system, you can select, for example, radio stations, previous destinations as well as themes, suggestions and favorites.
For recurring driving situations, such as long drives on the freeway, you can save your prefer red settings in a theme in the vehicle. In a theme you can save the display of the digital map, your preferred radio station and preferred drive pro gram, for example. The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then offers suggestions for the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations or contacts. The requirements for that are the selection of a profile, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. Favorites provide quick access to applications that are used often. You can select favorites from categories or add them directly to an appli cation.
Configuring profiles, themes and sugges tions
Multimedia system: 4 5f Profiles
Creating a new profile # SelectW Create Profile . # Select an avatar. # Enter the name and confirm witha. # Select Continuer . # Select Current Settings. # Select Save. # Activate Bluetooth and select Connect
Phone, to connect a mobile phone with the user profile .
# Select Finish.
Selecting profile options # Select for a profile.
The following functions are available: R Editing, resetting or deleting a profile R Resetting themes or favorites
MBUX multimedia system 237
R Configuring suggestions
Configuring suggestions # Select for a profile. # Select Suggestion Settings. # Switch Allow Destination Suggestions, Allow
Music Suggestions and Allow Contact Sug- gestions on or off.
# To deactivate the learning function for one day: activate Deactivate 24h Intelligent Learning. For 24 hours no new actions will be trained and no data recorded for the active profile. Suggestions will continue to be shown. Example: if the option is switched on and a route to a new destination has been calcula ted, this destination would not be taken into account for the learning function.
Creating new themes # Select. # Select THEMES.
# SelectW Create Theme. The settings which are saved in the theme are shown.
# Select Continuer. # Select Audio and Navigation (Navigation) and
store the active settings in the theme. # Select Continuer. # Select an entry screen. # Select Continuer. # Select an image. # Enter the names into the entry field and con
firm witha. # Select Save.
System settings Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make set tings in the following menus and control ele ments: R Display
— Styles
— Instrument lighting — Display brightness — Edge lighting — Day/night design R Control elements
— Keyboard language and handwriting rec ognition
— Touchpad sensitivity — Sensitivity of the Touch Controls R Voice Control System R MBUX Interior Assistant R Sound
— Entertainment — Navigation and traffic announcements — Telephone — Voice amplification to the rear passenger
compartment R Connectivity
— Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, NFC R MBUX Remote Control
238 MBUX multimedia system
— Authorizing and de-authorizing devices R Time & date R Language R Units for distance R Software updates R Data import/export R PIN protection R System Reset
Information on important system updates
Important system updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system’s data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. A system update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required
for installation R Installation of the downloaded system update R Activation of the downloaded system update
by restarting the system
% If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto matically.
The multimedia system provides a message when a system update is available. You have the following selection options: R Accept and Install
The system update will be downloaded in the background. R Information
Information about the pending system update is displayed. R Later
The system update can be downloaded man ually at a later time.
Deep system updates Deep system updates access vehicle or system settings and can therefore only be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off. If the download of a deep system update is com pleted and the downloaded system update is
ready for installation, you will be informed of this after the next ignition cycle, for example. % Park the vehicle safely in a suitable location
before starting the installation. Requirements for the installation: R The ignition is switched off. R Notes and warnings have been read and
accepted. R The electric parking brake is applied.
If all requirements have been fulfilled, the down loaded system update is installed. The multime dia system cannot be operated while the down loaded system update is being installed and vehicle functions are restricted. If errors should occur during the installation, the multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If restoration of the previous version is not possible, a symbol appears on the media display. Consult a quali fied specialist workshop to resolve the problem.
MBUX multimedia system 239
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements: R To set up the Wi-Fi connection of the mul
timedia system with external hotspots: there is no communication module installed. R The device to be connected supports at least
one of the types of connection described.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 System 5 Wi-Fi & Bluetooth
Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi # Select Wi-Fi.
Connecting the multimedia system with an external hotspot using Wi-Fi The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % The connection procedure may differ
depending on the device. Follow the instruc tions that are shown in the display. Further information can be found in the manufactur er’s operating instructions.
# Select Internet Settings. # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select Add Hotspot.
Connecting using a security key # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect Using Security Key. # Have the security key displayed on the device
to be connected (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions).
# Enter this security key on the multimedia sys tem.
# Confirm the entry with.
Connecting using a WPS PIN # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input.
The multimedia system generates an eight- digit PIN.
# Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. # Confirm the entry.
Connecting using a button # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Select Connect via WPS PBC. # Select «Connect via WPS PBC» in the options
on the device to be connected (see the man ufacturer’s operating instructions).
# Press the WPS button on the device to be connected.
# Select Continue in the multimedia system.
Activating automatic connection # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select the optionsr of the desired Wi-Fi
network. # Activate Permanent Internet Connection.
Connecting with a known Wi-Fi # Select Connect via Wi-Fi. # Select a Wi-Fi network.
The connection is established again.
240 MBUX multimedia system
Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi- Fi hotspot for external devices The type of connection established depends on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connec tion established must be selected on the multi media system and on the device to be connec ted. # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
Connecting using WPS PIN generation # Select Connect via WPS PIN Generation. # Enter the PIN shown in the media display on
the device to be connected and confirm.
Connecting using WPS PIN entry # Select Connect via WPS PIN Input. # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external
device’s display on the multimedia system.
Connecting using a button # Select Connect via WPS PBC.
# Press the push button on the device to be connected (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions).
# Select Continue.
Connecting using a security key # Select Connect Device to Vehicle Hotspot.
A security key is displayed. # Select the vehicle from the device to be con
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MB Hotspot XXXXX network name.
# Enter the security key which is shown in the media display on the device to be connected.
# Confirm the entry.
Connecting using NFC # Select Connect via NFC. # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the
manufacturer’s operating instructions). # Bring the mobile device into the NFC inter
face of the vehicle. # Select Finished.
The mobile device is now connected to the multimedia system hotspot via NFC.
Generating a new security key # Select Vehicle Hotspot. # Select Generate Security Key.
A connection will be established with the newly created security key.
# To save a security key: select Save. When a new security key is saved, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab lished, the new security key must be entered.
Navigation Notes on navigation
Route guidance with augmented reality
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic tion or wrong interpretation of the dis play
The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.
MBUX multimedia system 241
# Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
# Avoid extended observation of the cam era image.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi tional information
The additional information from the augmen ted reality display is not a substitute for observing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic
situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation (Navigation) # Alternatively: press thez button.
The map shows the vehicle’s current posi tion. The navigation menu is shown.
The navigation menu is hidden if route guid ance is active.
# To show: tap on the touchscreen. The menu is hidden automatically.
242 MBUX multimedia system
Navigation overview
Example: digital map with navigation menu 1 To enter a POI or address and additional des
tination entry options 2 To cancel active route guidance 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and
switch navigation announcements on or off
4 ON THE WAY menu with Route Overview, Alternative Routes and Report Traffic Inci- dent (Car-to-X) TRAFFIC menu with Traffic Announcements, Area Alerts and Live Traffic Subscription Info To display Route List
POSITION menu with Save Position and Compass
5 Quick access for Traffic, Parking and High- way Information as well as options for View, Announcements and Route via Advanced
MBUX multimedia system 243
Entering a destination
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation 5 Where to?
1 The federal state or province in which the vehicle is located
2 Enters a POI or address 3 List with additional destination entry options 4 Deletes an entry
5 a Confirms an entry 6 Switches to handwriting recognition 7 Enters a space 8 Switches to voice input 9 Sets the written language
A Switches to digits, special characters and symbols
B Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters
244 MBUX multimedia system
# Enter the destination in2. The entries can be made in any order. The following entries can be made, for exam ple: R City, street, house number R Street, city R ZIP code R POI name or POI category, e.g. Parking R Contact name
# Select a search result in list3. The route can be calculated.
% You can find further information about desti nation entry, e.g. 3 word addresses, in the Digital Operator’s Manual.
Changing country # Select the indicator for federal state or prov
ince1. # Select the federal state or the province in 1.
# Enter the country indicator. # Select the country on list3.
# Select the federal state or the province from list3.
Using online search Destination entry uses online map services. If the on-board search finds no suitable destina tions or if you change countries, the online search is available. For the destination you can enter an address, a POI or a 3 word address. # Select country indicator1. # Select the provider for the online service
from the countries list. or # If the on-board search delivers no results,
enter the destination in input line2. # Select the destination in the list.
The detailed view for the route is displayed.
Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance
Requirements: R The destination has been entered.
R The destination address is shown.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation
1 No route yet. A route has been mapped.
# Select. The route to the destination is calculated. Route guidance begins.
or # Select.
MBUX multimedia system 245
# Select Set as Waypoint. The destination address is set as the next intermediate destination.
or # Select Start New Route Guidance.
The destination address is set as the new destination. The previous destination and the intermediate destinations are deleted. Route guidance to the new destination begins.
Selecting route settings # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Route. # Select the route type. # Take traffic information into consideration
with Dynamic Route Guidancer. # Select route options with Avoid Options. # Activate Suggest Alternative Route.
Alternative routes are calculated for every route.
# Activate Activate Commuter Route. If the requirements are met, the multimedia system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Route guidance begins without voice output.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality # During route guidance, tap on the camera
symbol on the media display. The camera image will be shown instead of the navigation map before a turning maneu ver and will show additional information.
# To return to the navigation map: tap on the camera symbol again.
Displaying additional information in the cam era image # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select Augmented Reality. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers.
During route guidance, street names and house numbers are shown in the camera image.
Using map functions
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation
Setting the map scale # To zoom in: tap twice quickly with one finger
on the media display. # To zoom out: tap with two fingers on the
media display.
Moving the map # Move one finger in any direction on the
touchscreen. # To reset the map to the current vehicle
position: press\ briefly.
Selecting map orientation # Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol
on the map. The view changes in the sequence 3D, 2D Heading Up to 2D North Up.
Switching freeway information on/off # SelectZ.
246 MBUX multimedia system
# Switch Highway Information on or off.
Using services
Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me R The service is available. R The service has been activated at an author
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Navigation
Displaying the traffic situation with Live Traf fic Information # SelectZ. # Activate Traffic. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Switch on Traffic Incidents, Free Flowing
Traffic and Delay. If traffic information has been received, then traffic incidents such as roadworks, road blocks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warn ing messages are displayed. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or longer are taken into consideration.
Displaying hazard warnings with Car-to-X- Communication If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display
depends on the settings for the Traffic and Traf- fic Incidents options. # Set the options.
If Traffic is switched off and Traffic Incidents is switched on, the symbols are shown on the prospective route.
Displaying weather information and other map contents # SelectZ. # Select Advanced. # Select View. # Select Map Elements. # Scroll up and show the ONLINE MAP CON-
TENT category. # Switch on a service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.
MBUX multimedia system 247
Telephone Telephony
Notes on telephony
& WARNING Risk of distraction from oper ating integrated communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the
traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip ment while the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com
munications devices when the vehicle is stationary.
# As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can
not be thrown around in such situa tions.
# Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
# Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
# Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart ment.
248 MBUX multimedia system
Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 104) R Stowing and securing the mobile phone
(/ page 123) Bluetooth connection: The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth profile of the connected mobile phone. Full functionality is only available if the mobile phone supports both of the following Bluetooth profiles: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
— The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
R MAP (Message Access Profile) — The mobile phone message functions can
be used on the multimedia system.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth audio functional ity can by used with any mobile radio unit.
For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man ufacturer’s operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception
station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available R a mobile phone with «Twincard» is logged into
the network with the second SIM card at the same time
The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice for improved speech quality. A require ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.
Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
MBUX multimedia system 249
Telephone menu overview
1 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2 Bluetooth device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
3 Battery status of the connected mobile phone
4 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 5 Options 6 Device manager 7 Messages 8 Numerical pad 9 Contact search
Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime
dia system via Bluetooth.
250 MBUX multimedia system
R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode). — You can use all the functions of the multi
media system with the mobile phone in the foreground.
— You can receive incoming calls and mes sages with the mobile phone in the back ground. You can interchange the mobile phone in the foreground and background.
Connecting a mobile phone Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer’s operating instruc tions). R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia
system.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone
Searching for a mobile phone # Select. # Select Connect New Device.
Connecting a mobile phone Authorization follows using secure simple pair ing. # Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.
Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.:
— R Accept a call — k End Call — i Create Conf. Call — Accepting or rejecting a waiting call
R Managing contacts, e.g.: — Downloading mobile phone contacts — Managing the format of a contact’s name — Saving a contact as a favorite R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:
— Using the read-aloud function — Dictating a new message
Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv ices. You can use the following services via the multi media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me
button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Concierge Service (me button), if activated
MBUX multimedia system 251
R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto matic emergency call and SOS button)
Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management, the Mercedes me connect Con cierge Service (if service is activated) and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are availa ble for you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle’s overhead control panel (/ page 253). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 254). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 259). Observe the conditions of use for Mercedes me connect and other services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Information on Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer
gency call system (/ page 259) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci dent and Breakdown Management. Forward ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on
location and/or the towing away of the vehi cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. R Addition to the emergency guide after auto
matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 254)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. R Addition to the Mercedes me connect
service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.
252 MBUX multimedia system
% These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys tem.
More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me con nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con
trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services
Which data is transferred for the services can be taken from the currently valid terms of use. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me por tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
1 me button for service, concierge or informa tion calls
2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system)
# To make a Mercedes me call: press me button1.
# To make an emergency call: press SOS button cover2 briefly to open.
# Press and hold SOS button3 for at least one second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 253). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Concierge Service (if the service is activated) R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general
information about the vehicle
MBUX multimedia system 253
You can find information on the following topics: R Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 255).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner’s GSM network cover
age is available in the respective region. R The ignition must be switched on so that
vehicle data can be transferred automati cally.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Phone 5g
# Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the media display.
Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % In some countries, or if the Concierge
Service is active, you will be connected directly with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. The Concierge Service is not available in all countries. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection Requirements:
R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on.
% This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes
me connect service «Accident and Break down Management» is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 252). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
takes your call and organizes the break down and accident assistance.
254 MBUX multimedia system
You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident,
an automatic emergency call can be initi ated. This has priority over all other active calls.
% In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service «Telediagnostics» is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
% If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service «Telediagnostics», can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select
Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint ment and if necessary consult about the details.
% If you select Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reap pears at a later time.
Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The ignition is switched on. R The required data transfer technology is sup
ported by the mobile service operator. R The quality of the mobile connection is suffi
cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission
technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv
ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys
tem.
MBUX multimedia system 255
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R Confirmation of the data protection prompt R Country indicator of the vehicle R Set language for the multimedia system R Telephone number of the communication
platform installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data
If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv ices are activated Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transmitted can be found in the respective terms of use for Mercedes me connect services. These can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https:// me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center
and, if required to process the incident, forwar ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page at https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in
every country.
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu
When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes
me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Mercedes me & Apps in the multimedia system.
256 MBUX multimedia system
In the Mercedes me & Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes
me user account R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes
me user account and the vehicle
R Calling up the Mercedes me services R Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the
web browser depending on availability
Web browser overview
You can call up websites with the web browser. The web browser is started using the Mercedes me & Apps menu.
1 URL entry 2 Bookmarks 3 Web page, back
4 Web page, forwards 5 To refresh/stop 6 Options
% Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.
MBUX multimedia system 257
Smartphone integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue tooth with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte gration is only possible with an Internet connec tion. The appropriate application must be down loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to a USB port with the symbol on the multimedia system using a suita ble cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the
function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con trol box) R Apple CarPlay
R Android Auto
You can start Smartphone Integration using the Mercedes me & Apps menu. You can end Smartphone Integration by discon necting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system.
Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized)
The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed
R Compass direction R Acceleration direction
This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system
Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system («eCall»). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net work coverage from the wireless service provid ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes- Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data
258 MBUX multimedia system
detailed in the «Mercedes-Benz emergency call system data transmission» section that follows (/ page 261). To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle’s communication mod ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me con nect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The ignition must be switched on before an auto matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.
Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically (/ page 259) or manually (/ page 260) Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit uation.
Messages on the display SOS NOT READY: the ignition is not on or eCall not available. During an active emergency call, G appears in the display.
You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes- benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/ % If there is a malfunction in the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system (e.g. a fault with the speaker, microphone, airbag, SOS but ton), a corresponding message appears in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster.
Triggering an automatic MercedesBenz emergency call
Requirements: R The ignition is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged.
The MercedesBenz emergency call system trig gers an emergency call automatically in the fol lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident R After an automatically initiated emergency
stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist
MBUX multimedia system 259
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the
MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. The MercedesBenz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator.
R Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. R If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu
lance is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer gency call
# To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press and hold the SOS but ton for at least one second (/ page 253).
# To use the voice control system: use the Voice Control System voice commands .
The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted
to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.
R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer gency call center operator. R Based on the call, the operator decides
whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your
mobile phone.
Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # On the multifunction steering wheel:
select~. Depress the button for several seconds.
260 MBUX multimedia system
Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer gency call system
In the event of an automatic or manual emer gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle’s GPS position data R GPS position data on the route
( (a few hundred meters )before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the
vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available
or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated
manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system
Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU
SA’s Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR- MERC. For Canada, please contact MBC’s Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter
mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established.
MBUX multimedia system 261
Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu
Symbol Designation Function
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.
8 Rest Select to pause the playback.
: Repeating a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated.
9 Random playback Select to play back tracks in random order.
Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
Options Select to show additional options.
5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.).
Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres, moods or videos, for example.
262 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Designation Function
Z Settings Select to make settings.
Home Select to return to the home screen.
j Messaging Select to call up messaging.
2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode
The following functions and settings are available in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth) R Playing back audio or video files
Authorizing a Bluetooth audio device for media playback
Requirements: R Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia
system and audio equipment.
R The audio equipment supports the Blue tooth audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. R The audio equipment is «visible» for other
devices.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Media 5 Bluetooth 5
With Bluetooth audio, you can play back music files from an external data storage medium, e.g. your smartphone, using the MBUX multimedia system. # To play back audio files using the multimedia
system, authorize the external data storage medium on the MBUX multimedia system.
Authorizing a new Bluetooth audio device # Select Connect New Device. # Select an audio device.
Authorization starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
# If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment.
# Select Only as Bluetooth Audio Device. The Bluetooth audio equipment is connec ted with the multimedia system.
MBUX multimedia system 263
Connecting previously authorized Bluetooth audio equipment # Select a Bluetooth audio device from the
list. The connection is being established.
Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu
Symbol Designation Function
Home Select to return to the home screen.
j Messaging Select to call up messaging.
Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
Z Options Select to have further options shown. Settings can be made to the following addi tional functions, for example: R Navigation and traffic announcements R Frequency Fix function R Radio additional text R Emergency warnings
The setting options are country-dependent.
264 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Designation Function
HD HD radio Select to switch the HD radio function on or off. This function is not available in all countries.
8 Mute function Select to switch off the sound
f Storing radio stations Select to save a station in the presets
4 Station list Select to have the station list shown.
Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres, moods or videos, for example.
Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be
transmitted when using TuneIn Radio.
MBUX multimedia system 265
Symbol Designation Function
Z Options The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to/out of the TuneIn account
Favorites Select during playback to save the station cur rently set as a favorite.
6 Play/Stop Select to start, stop or continue playback.
5 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.
Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel
lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
% Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
266 MBUX multimedia system
Symbol Designation Function
Z Options The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate parental control to lock channels
with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport
alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam
lessly
5 Playback controls Select to show the timeline. Tap any point on the timeline to skip forwards or back. Navigate to the end of the timeline to return to live mode.
6 Play Select to start or continue playback.
8 Rest Select to pause the playback.
Depending on the frequency band selected, dif ferent functions are available to you.
Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.
Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements:
MBUX multimedia system 267
R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. R The data volume is available.
Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis
sion free of interference.
% New data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
% The functions and services are country- dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio.
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
% The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.
Setting up satellite radio
Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider
has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas
ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z Options # Select Service Information.
The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub scription status.
# Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff’s instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten minutes.
% You can also have the satellite service acti vated online. To do so, please visit http://
www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Music and sport alerts
Multimedia system: 4 5 Radio 5 SiriusXM 5Z 5 Alerts
Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of
matches in the Live program.
Activating the music information function # Activate Music Alerts O.
Setting a music alert # Select Add Alert.
268 MBUX multimedia system
# Select Artists or Song in the dialog window. The alert is set for the current artist or track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.
Activating sports information # Activate Activate Sports Alerts O.
Setting a sport alert # Select Add Alert. # Select the team name or league in the dialog
window.
Deleting individual sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select an artist or track. or # Select a team. # Select Delete Selected Entries.
All highlighted alerts are deleted.
Deleting all sports and music alerts # Select Manage Music Alerts. or # Select Manage Sports Alerts. # Select Delete All Entries.
All alerts are deleted.
Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator’s Manual.
Standard sound system and Advanced sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer
— Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume
— Automatic adjustment
Burmester surround sound system and Burmester high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer
— Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seats (Burmester high-end 3D surround
sound system) R Sound profiles R Volume
— Automatic adjustment
MBUX multimedia system 269
ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the Instrument Display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long
periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Displaying the service due date
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 ASSYST PLUS The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button
on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the on-board computer
(/ page 225).
Information on regular maintenance work
* NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates
Service work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
# Always observe the prescribed service intervals.
# Always have the prescribed service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor mal operation of the vehicle. Maintenance work will need to be performed more often if the vehi cle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R regular city driving with frequent intermedi
ate stops R mainly short-distance driving
270 Maintenance and care
R frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces R when the engine is often left idling for long
periods R operation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, engine air cleaner, engine oil and oil filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Fur ther information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can only calculate the service due date when the battery is connected. # Note down the service due date displayed on
the instrument display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 270).
Engine compartment Opening/closing the hood
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driv ing with the hood unlocked
The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood
is locked.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood
The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood’s range of movement. # Open or close the hood only when there
is nobody in the hood’s range of move ment.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com
partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts
Components in the engine compartment may continue running or start up suddenly, even if the ignition is switched off. Make sure of the following before performing tasks in the engine compartment: # Switch the ignition off.
Maintenance and care 271
# Never reach into the danger zone sur rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
# Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
& WARNING Risk of injury from touching components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition
system or the fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on.
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
# To open: pull lever1 to release the hood.
272 Maintenance and care
# Push yellow handle1 on the hood catch to the left as far as it will go (palm downwards). Lift the hood until it is automatically raised by the pneumatic spring.
# To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
# If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little force until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the on- board computer Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed.
The engine oil level is determined during driving. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Engine Oil Level You will see one of the following messages on the multifunction display: R Measuring Engine Oil Level…: measurement
of the oil level is not yet possible.
# Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes’ driving. R Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for
indicating the oil level on the multifunction
display is green and is between «min» and «max»: the oil level is correct.
R Engine Oil Level Add 1,1 qts. and the bar dis play for indicating the oil level on the multi function display is orange and is below «min»:
# Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. R Reduce Engine Oil Level and the bar display
for indicating the oil level on the multifunc tion display is orange and is above «max»:
# Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. R For Engine Oil Level Switch Ignition On # Switch on the ignition to check the engine oil
level. R Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil
level sensor is defective or not connected.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. R Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavail. # Close the hood.
Maintenance and care 273
Adding engine oil
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor
oughly clean the engine oil from compo nent parts before starting the vehicle.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
* NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
# Turn cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
# Add engine oil. # Replace cap1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages. # Check the oil level again (/ page 273).
274 Maintenance and care
Checking coolant level
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres
sure.
# Park the vehicle on a level surface. # Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot tom quarter of the temperature display.
# Slowly turn cap1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure.
# Continue turning cap1 counter-clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
0.6 in (1.5 cm) over marker bar2.
# If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Further information on coolant
(/ page 344).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system
& WARNING Risk of burns from hot com ponent parts in the engine compartment
Certain components in the engine compart ment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system.
Maintenance and care 275
# Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.
& WARNING Danger of burns when open ing the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the
engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com
partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.
# Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
# Remove cap1 by the tab. # Add washer fluid.
Keeping the air-water duct free
# Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves.
Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash
& WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle
The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed,
brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.
276 Maintenance and care
* NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit uations: # During towing # In a car wash
* NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
# Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
# Ensure there is sufficient ground clear ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.
# Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function are deactivated. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are
completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation/heating is
switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position
g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of
10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. R In car washes with a conveyor system: neu
trali is engaged.
% In car washes with a conveyor system: if you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the SmartKey is located in the vehicle. The park positionj is otherwise automatically engaged.
% If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Automatic car wash mode In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into the automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 12 mph (20 km/h) (/ page 278). The following settings are made when car wash mode is activated: R The outside mirrors are folded in. R The rain sensor is deactivated to prevent the
windshield washer system from starting up automatically. R The rear window wiper is deactivated. R The air conditioning system is set to air-recir
culation mode.
Maintenance and care 277
R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated. R Vehicles with surround view camera: the
front image is activated after approx. eight seconds.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a% behind the respective set ting. Above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) car wash mode is automatically deactivated. The following settings are reset when car wash mode is deactivated: R The outside mirrors are folded out. R The rain sensor is activated. R The rear window wiper is activated. R The air conditioning system is set to fresh air
mode. R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is reset to the
previously selected setting. R Vehicles with surround view camera: the
front image is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h).
Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode
Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The engine is running.
Multimedia system: 4 5 Settings 5 Quick Access
Activating automatic car wash mode # Select Automatic Car Wash Mode. # Select Start.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is displayed by a% behind the respective set ting. % For an overview of the settings made when
activating automatic car wash mode (/ page 276).
Deactivating automatic car wash mode # Select Stop.
The automatic car wash settings are reset.
% The automatic car wash mode is automati cally deactivated as soon as a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) is exceeded.
Notes on using a power washer
& WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with round-
spray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol lowing when using a power washer: R Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away
from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally.
278 Maintenance and care
R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140 F (60 C). R Observe the information on the correct dis
tance in the equipment manufacturer’s oper ating instructions. R Do not point the nozzle of the power washer
directly at sensitive parts such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sour ces and ventilation slots.
Washing the vehicle by hand
Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays.
# Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using
a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
# Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.
Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care
Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid damaging the paintwork.
Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
afterwards. R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro leum ether or lighter fluid. R Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp
cloth and clean water.
R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate
rials. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matte finish R Only use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the
latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash programs with a final
hot wax treatment. R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish
ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on cleaning decorative foils
Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter «Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint
Maintenance and care 279
work care» (/ page 279). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage.
Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. R If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora
tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off
afterwards. R To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped
vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative foil R The service life and color of decorative foils
are impaired by: — Sunlight — Temperature, e.g. hot air blower — Weather conditions — Stone chippings and dirt — Chemical cleaning agents — Oily products R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil.
Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. R Do not treat matte or structured decorative
foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif ferences may occur between the surfaces that
were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on care of vehicle parts
& WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned
If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
280 Maintenance and care
& WARNING Risk of burns from the tail pipe and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around
the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
# Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.
Observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehicle parts to avoid damage.
Wheels/rims R Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove
brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The
brake discs and brake pads warm up and dry out.
Windows R Clean windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-
based cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows.
Wiper blades R Fold out the wiper blades and clean them
using a damp cloth. R Do not clean the wiper blades too often.
Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear
bumper and in the radiator grill with a soft cloth and car shampoo.
R When using a power washer, maintain a mini mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).
Rear view camera and surround view camera R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the
camera lens. R Do not use a power washer.
Tailpipes R Clean with a cleaning agent recommended
for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents.
Notes on care of the interior
& WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol vent-based care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.
Maintenance and care 281
# Do not use any care or cleaning prod ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
& WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.
Observe the notes on cleaning and care to avoid vehicle damage.
Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over
176 F (80 C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display R Switch off the display and let it cool down.
R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT/LCD). R Do not use any other agents.
Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: use a care product recom
mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate
rials. R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sun cream to come in contact with the plas tic trim.
Real wood/trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: use a care product recom
mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents,
polishes or waxes.
Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec
ommended for Mercedes-Benz.
Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a
dry cloth. R Leather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not allow the leather to become too
damp. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth.
282 Maintenance and care
Cloth seat covers R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1%
soap solution and allow to dry.
Maintenance and care 283
Emergency Removing the safety vest
The safety vests are located in the storage com partments in the driver and front passenger door. # To remove: pull out the safety vest bag by
the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest. % There are also safety vest compartments in
the rear door storage compartments in which safety vests can be stored.
1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature 3 Do not bleach 4 Do not iron 5 Do not tumble dry 6 Do not dry clean 7 Class 2 safety vest
The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. The safety vest must be replaced in the following situations: R the reflective strips are damaged or dirty
R the maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded R the fluorescence has faded
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
284 Breakdown assistance
Vehicles with three rows of seats
# Open the cargo compartment floor. # Remove warning triangle1.
Setting up the warning triangle
# Fold side reflectors1 upwards to form a tri angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud2.
# Fold legs3 down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview
First-aid kit (soft sided)1 is under the cargo compartment floor.
Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire
& WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire
A flat tire severely affects the driving charac teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.
Breakdown assistance 285
Tires without run-flat characteristics: # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Change the flat tire immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe cialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire).
In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle’s equip ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos
sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 286). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair
the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 287).
R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 253). R All vehicles: change the wheel
(/ page 329).
% The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries.
Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)
& WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode
When driving in emergency mode the han dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum
speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
# Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: R Banging noise R Vehicle vibration R Smoke which smells like rubber R Continuous ESP intervention R Cracks in the tire side walls
# After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special ist workshop with regard to their further use.
# The defective tire must be replaced in every case.
With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire.
286 Breakdown assistance
Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con junction with an activated tire pressure monitor ing system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display, proceed as follows: R Check the tires for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance pos sible in emergency
mode
Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)
Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)
The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style.
Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand ard tire as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
The TIREFIT kit is located under the cargo com partment floor.
1 Tire inflation compressor 2 Tire sealant bottle
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements: Required tools: R Tire sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker R Sticker with details of the maximum permis
sible speed R Tire inflation compressor R Gloves
TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 287) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 F (-20 C).
& WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant
The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases:
Breakdown assistance 287
R There are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than damage previously men tioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at very low tire pressure
or on a flat tire.
# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately using water.
# If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.
# If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.
# Change out of any clothes contamina ted with tire sealant immediately.
# If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.
* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety notes on the sticker on the tire sealant bottle. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali fied specialist workshop every five years.
# Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tire.
# Remove sticker1 from the tire inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instru ment cluster within the driver’s field of vision.
288 Breakdown assistance
# Remove sticker2 from the tire sealant bot tle and affix it near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire.
# Pull plug7 with the cable and filler hose3 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
# Insert tire sealant bottle9 in socket6 of the tire inflation compressor in such a way that the red arrow on tire sealant bottle9 matches the red arrow on the tire inflation compressor.
# Turn tire sealant bottle9 a quarter turn clockwise.
# Insert the plug of filler hose3 in socket5 of tire sealant bottle9.
# Turn filler hose3 a quarter turn clockwise.
# Remove the valve cap from valveA on the faulty tire.
# Screw union nut4 of filler hose3 onto valveA.
# Insert plug7 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.
# Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni tion lock.
Breakdown assistance 289
# Press on and off switch8 on the tire infla tion compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compres sor during this phase. # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy lene.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained
If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.
# Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose.
290 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed
limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
# Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h).
# The sticker with details of the maximum per missible speed must be affixed to the instru ment cluster where it can be easily seen by the driver.
* NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant
After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose.
# Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal
Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla tion compressor.
# Pull away immediately. # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes
and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
& WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained
If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
In cases such as the one mentioned above, con tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Bpillar on the driver’s side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values.
# To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
Breakdown assistance 291
# To reduce the tire pressure: remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation com pressor.
# Insert the filler hose in the socket of the tire inflation compressor and turn it a quarter turn clockwise.
# Press pressure release buttonC next to manometerB.
# When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.
# Store the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla tion compressor.
# Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat tery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking
R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle’s speed is not adapted to the road conditions
# In the event of a short circuit or a simi lar incident, contact a qualified special ist workshop immediately.
# Do not drive on. # Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
R Further information on ABS (/ page 173) R Further information on ESP (/ page 174) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be dam aged in the event of an accident.
292 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat tery.
The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance.
& WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery.
# Immediately rinse battery acid off thor oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage caused by improper disposal of batteries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. #
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corro sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses.
Breakdown assistance 293
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator’s Manual.
If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R activate standby mode, or R connect the battery to a battery charger
approved by Mercedes-Benz, or R consult a qualified specialist workshop to
disconnect the battery
Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec tion point in the engine compartment.
* NOTE Damage to the battery from over voltage
When charging using a battery charger with out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
& WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro gen gas igniting
There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of
the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
# Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
# The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con necting and disconnecting the battery.
# When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat tery terminals with identical polarity.
# During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con necting and disconnecting the jumper cable.
# Do not connect or disconnect the bat tery clamps while the engine is running.
& WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance
During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks
and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila
tion. # Do not lean over a battery.
294 Breakdown assistance
& WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro zen battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
* NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cable/charging
cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not
come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged.
R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger’s operating instruc
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R For starting assistance, only use batteries
with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Gasoline engine: Only accept starting assis
tance if the engine and exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Requirements:
Breakdown assistance 295
R The vehicle is secured with the electric park ing brake. R Automatic transmission: The transmission
is in positionj. R The ignition and all electrical consumers are
switched off. R The hood is open.
# Slide cover1 of positive clamp2 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc tion of the arrow.
# Connect positive clamp2 on your vehicle to the positive pole of the donor battery using the jumper cable/charging cable. Always begin with positive clamp2 on your own vehicle first.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
# Connect the negative pole of the donor bat tery and ground point3 of your own vehicle by using the jumper cable/charging cable. Begin with the donor battery first.
# During starting assistance: start the engine of your own vehicle.
# During the charging process: start the charging process.
# During starting assistance: let the engines run for several minutes.
# During starting assistance: before discon necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec
trical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is complete: # First, remove the jumper cable/charging
cable from ground point3 and the negative pole of the donor battery, then from positive clamp2 and the positive pole of the donor battery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first.
# After removing the jumper cable/charging cable, close cover1 of positive clamp2.
Further information can be obtained at a quali fied specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
# Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 292).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
296 Breakdown assistance
Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specific vehicle require ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat). Full vehi cle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes- Benz recommends that you only use batter ies which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Use detachable parts such as vent hoses,
elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery which is to be replaced. R Make sure that the vent hose is always con
nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. R Make sure that detachable parts are recon
nected in the same way.
Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods
Permitted towing methods Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys tems.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing with steering wheel lock
You will no longer be able to steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock is engaged. # Always switch on the ignition when tow
ing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow ing away incorrectly
# Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
Both axles on the ground
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Rear axle raised
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
4MATIC vehicles
Both axles on the ground
Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised
No
Rear axle raised
No
To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.
Breakdown assistance 297
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
# Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 297).
# Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be
released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission:
The automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni orj
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif ted to positioni, or the multifunction dis play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported away (/ page 299). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta tion.
* NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when tow ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h)
must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km)
must not be exceeded.
& WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy
If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permis sible gross mass of your own vehicle, other wise the following could occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or even rollover.
# If another vehicle is tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed
the permissible gross mass of your own vehicle.
If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross weight must not exceed the permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden tification plate (/ page 339).
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver’s door or front passenger door, otherwise the automatic transmission automatically shifts to positionj.
# Install the towing eye (/ page 300). # Fasten the tow bar.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec tion of the tow bar
# Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.
# Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism (/ page 70).
298 Breakdown assistance
# Do not activate the HOLD function. # Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 87). # Deactivate Active Brake Assist
(/ page 181). # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position i.
# Release the electric parking brake.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to limi ted safety-related functions during the towing process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon ger available in the following situations: R The ignition is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys
tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is then towed away, signif icantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.
# Use a tow bar. # Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle away.
* NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
# Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 298).
# Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position i.
% Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission may be locked in positionj in the event of damage to the electrical system. To shift toi, provide the on-board electrical system with power (/ page 295).
# Load the vehicle onto the transporter. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift the automatic transmission to position j.
# Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
# Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS)
& WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS
When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid.
Breakdown assistance 299
# When transporting, ensure that: R The vehicle has been loaded onto
the transporter correctly R The vehicle is secured at all four
wheels with suitable tensioning straps R The maximum permissible speed of
35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded when transporting
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur ing it incorrectly
# After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
# A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform.
# Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission
# Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning
# Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi cle.
Towing eye storage location
Towing eye is under the cargo compartment floor.
Installing the towing eye
# Press the mark on cover1 inwards and remove.
300 Breakdown assistance
# Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
% Make sure that cover1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye.
* NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye
When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc ess. # Only use the towing eye to tow away or
tow start the vehicle.
Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)
Vehicles with automatic transmission
* NOTE Damage to the automatic trans mission due to tow starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started.
# Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started.
Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci
fied new fuses containing the correct amperage.
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and fur ther information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the engine compartment (/ page 302).
* NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.
Breakdown assistance 301
# When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
# When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel (/ page 302) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 303)
R Fuse box in the center of the cargo compart ment (/ page 304)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment
Requirements: R A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 301).
Opening
& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open
When the engine hood is open and the wind shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers
and ignition before opening the engine hood.
# Open the hood.
# Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.
# Loosen screws1. # Press clamps2 and lift the fuse box lid up
and out.
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the side of the fuse box.
302 Breakdown assistance
Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor
rectly in the lid. # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Make sure that clamps2 engage. # Tighten screws1. # Close the hood.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 301).
Opening
# Lift carpet1 in the direction of the arrow.
# Loosen screws2 and remove the fuse box lid from the top.
Closing # Place the lid on the fuse box. # Tighten screws2. # Fold back the carpet.
Breakdown assistance 303
Opening and closing the fuse box in the cargo compartment
Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 301). # Open the cargo compartment floor .
Fuse box1 is located underneath the cargo compartment floor.
304 Breakdown assistance
Notes on noise or unusual handling charac teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires
& WARNING Risk of injury through dam aged tires
Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
& WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread
Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.
Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: in (3 mm) R M+S tires:in (4 mm)
# For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off- road: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 306).
R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. R Check the valve caps. R Visual check of the tire tread depth and the
tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is in (3 mm) and for winter tires in (4 mm).
Six marks1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately in (1.6 mm) has been reached.
Wheels and tires 305
Notes on snow chains
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect snow chain fitting
If you fit snow chains to the rear wheels, the snow chains may grind against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never fit snow chains to the rear
wheels. # Always fit snow chains to the front
wheels in pairs.
* NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains
If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear
wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.
* NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from mounted snow chains
If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, the wheel trims can be damaged. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels
before mounting snow chains.
Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum
permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do
not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed.
% You can deactivate ESP to pull away (/ page 176). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.
Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure
& WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf ficient or excessive tire pressure
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: R The tires may burst, especially as the
load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
# Comply with the recommended tire pressure and check the tire pressure of
306 Wheels and tires
all tires including the spare wheel regu larly: R at least once a month R when the load changes R before embarking on a longer journey R if operating conditions change, e.g. off-
road driving
# Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
Tires with pressure that is too low can over heat and burst as a result. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can significantly
impair the braking properties and the han dling characteristics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Increased fuel consumption
& WARNING Risk of accident from exces sive tire pressure
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by highway fill, pot holes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak ing properties and the handling characteris tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures in
all the tires, including the spare wheel.
Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by repeated drop in tire pressure
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires to burst. # Inspect the tire for signs of foreign
objects. # Check whether the wheel or valve has a
leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Wheels and tires 307
You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle’s factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the
Bpillar of your vehicle (/ page 313). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (/ page 308).
Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 319). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
The vehicle’s tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure.
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys tem: You can also check the tire pressure using the on-board computer. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valve
If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause a loss of tire pressure. Aftermarket tire pressure monitor ing systems will cause the tire valve to remain open, depending on the design. This can also result in a loss of tire pressure. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve
caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example
data.
If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions «partially laden» and «fully laden» are defined in the table for different num bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.
308 Wheels and tires
Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 320). R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 313) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 319)
Checking tire pressures manually
# Read the tire pressure for the current operat ing conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
# Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.
# Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.
# Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom
mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.
# If the tire pressure is higher than the recom mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.
# Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306)
R Tire pressure table (/ page 308) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 313)
Tire pressure monitoring system
Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys tem
& DANGER Risk of accident due to incor rect tire pressure
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommen ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi cle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
Wheels and tires 309
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under- inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate that the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys tem detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea sons, including the installation of replace ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed to the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear in the multifunction display (/ page 311).
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned in the following ways: R via display messages (/ page 391) R via theh warning lamp in the instrument
cluster (/ page 410)
The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 311).
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R the tire pressure has been set incorrectly R there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for
example, by a foreign object penetrating the tire
310 Wheels and tires
R there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source
Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres sure monitoring system Requirements: R The ignition is switched on.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure and tire temperature of
the individual wheels:
R Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes R Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni tored.
# Compare the tire pressure with the recom mended tire pressure for the current operat ing condition (/ page 308). Observe the notes on tire temperature (/ page 306).
% The values displayed in the multifunction dis play may deviate from those of the tire pres sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure.
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys tem Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all of the wheels (/ page 306).
Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Use Current Pressures as New Refer- ence Values message is shown in the multi function display.
# To restart, press Touch Control on the left- hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellowh warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
Wheels and tires 311
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306)
Tire pressure loss warning system
Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss.
System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R incorrectly set tire pressure R sudden pressure loss caused, for example,
by a foreign object penetrating the tire R steady pressure loss in several tires
The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R driving with snow chains
R when adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel eration R driving with a high load
The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306) R Display messages about the tires
(/ page 391)
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on all wheels.
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or
newly installed.
On-board computer: 4 Service 5 Tires # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Control System ActiveRestart message is shown in the multi function display.
# To begin restart, press Touch Control on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message is shown in the multifunction display.
# Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press Touch Control on
the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the multifunction display.
312 Wheels and tires
After you have driven for a few minutes, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressures of all the tires.
Be sure to also pay attention to the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306)
Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac ard
& WARNING Risk of accident from overloa ded tires
Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load-bearing capacity of
the tires. # The load-bearing capacity must be at
least half the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle.
# Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard % The data shown in the illustration is example data.
The Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R Maximum number of seats2 according to
the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. R Maximum permissible load3 comprises the
gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage.
Wheels and tires 313
R Recommended tire pressures1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads
on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 339). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres
sure table (/ page 308).
Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load
(/ page 314) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306).
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur suant to the «National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966».
# (1): Locate the statement «The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.» on your vehicle’s placard.
# (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
# (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
# (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the «XXX» amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 — 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
# (5): Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. The weight may not safely exceed the availa ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula ted in Step 4.
# (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
% Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Even if you have calculated the total load care fully, you should still make sure that the maxi mum permissible gross weight and the maxi mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi cle identification plate. # Have your loaded vehicle including driver,
occupants and load weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.
Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max
imum load (/ page 315)
314 Wheels and tires
R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 313) R Tire pressure table (/ page 308) R Vehicle identification plate
Calculation example for determining the maximum load
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi cle stated on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 313). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)
5 1
Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3
Front: 1
Wheels and tires 315
Example 1 Example 2
Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)
316 Wheels and tires
Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (/ page 317)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (/ page 318)
3 Maximum tire load (/ page 319) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 319)
5 Manufacturer 6 Characteristics of the tire (/ page 320) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 320) 8 Tire name
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Tire Quality Grading
In accordance with the US Department of Trans portation’s «Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand ards», tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per formance factors:
1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade
% The data shown in the illustration is example data.
% The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.
Tread wear grade The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified test track of the US Department of Transportation. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
Wheels and tires 317
and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction grade
& DANGER Risk of accident due to inade quate traction
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include either accelera tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. # Always adapt your driving style and
drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.
* NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin
# Avoid wheelspin.
The traction classes, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified govern ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance.
Temperature grade
& WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure
The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres
sures and regularly check the tire pres
sure of all tires including the spare wheel.
# Adjust the tire pressure as necessary.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C. They represent the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per formance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.
318 Wheels and tires
% The data shown in the image is example data.
The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol marks1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu
facturer identification code2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 325).
R Tire size: identifier3 describes the tire size. R Tire type code: tire type code4 can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. «3208» represents the 32nd week of 2008).
Information on the maximum tire load
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Maximum tire load1 is the maximum permissi ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv er’s side (/ page 313).
Specifications for maximum tire pressure
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Wheels and tires 319
Never exceed maximum tire pressure1 speci fied for the tire.
Information on tire characteristics
% The data shown in the image is example data.
This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall1 and under tire tread2.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
1 Preceding letter 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code 5 Rim diameter 6 Load-bearing index 7 Speed rating 8 Load index
% The data shown in the image is example data.
Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
320 Wheels and tires
Preceding letter1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards. R «P»: passenger vehicle tires according to US
manufacturing standards. R «LT»: light truck tires according to US manu
facturing standards. R «T»: compact emergency spare wheels with
high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.
Aspect ratio3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per cent (tire height divided by tire width).
Tire code4 (tire type): R «R» radial tire R «D»: bias ply tire R «B»: bias belted tires R «ZR»: radial tire with a maximum speed above
149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)
Rim diameter5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. «91» corre sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the permissible axle load of your vehi cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and
Loading Information placard (/ page 313) R Maximum tire load (/ page 319) R Load index
Speed rating7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.
% An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Wheels and tires 321
Index Speed rating
ZR…Y4 up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR…(..Y)4 over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR4 over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R Specifying the speed rating as the «ZR» index in tire code4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). R If your tire code4 includes «ZR» and there
is no speed rating7, find out what the max imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. R If load-bearing index6 and speed rating7
are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S5 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S5 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S5 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S5 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Winter tires bear thei snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.
Load index8: R No specification given: standard load (SL)
tire R «XL» or «Extra Load»: extra load tire or rein
forced tire R «Light Load»: light load tire
R «C», «D», «E»: a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure
Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber- coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT- marked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).
4 «ZR» stated in the tire code. 5 Or «M+Si» for winter tires
322 Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac tory. The tire and information table contains the rec ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max imum permissible load and the maximum per missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver’s side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver’s side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight
of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci fied on the vehicle identification plate on the Bpillar on the driver’s side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load- bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if
Wheels and tires 323
these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur
er’s identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.
324 Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires
& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor rect dimensions of wheels and tires
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen sion components may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with
those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: R Designation R Model
When replacing tires, make sure to install the correct: R Designation R Manufacturer R Model
& WARNING Risk of injury through exceed ing the specified tire load-bearing capa city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed
rating required for your vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved
For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the con trol systems, such as ABS, ESP and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tire only for certain wheels) R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer
tain AMG tires)
Certain characteristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Fur thermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle com ponents when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
* NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea ded tires
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. For this reason driving safety cannot be guar anteed.
Wheels and tires 325
# Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.
* NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a lower tire section width. The lower the tire section width, the greater is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when driving over obstacles. # Avoid obstacles or drive particularly
carefully.
* NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes
Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. # Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.
* NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified
specialist workshop only.
* NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus ing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 F (7 C),
use M+S tires .
Accessory parts that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations
& WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires
There is an increased risk of skidding and hydroplaning when using sport tires on wet roads. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Activate ESP and adapt your driving
style accordingly. # Use M+S tires at outside temperatures
below 50 F (10 C). # Only use the tires for their intended pur
pose.
326 Wheels and tires
Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in
certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one
axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system: All installed wheels must be equip ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R At temperatures below 45 F (7 C) use win
ter tires or all-season tires marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tires bearing thei snowflake sym bol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi tions. R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same
tread. R Observe the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tires installed. If the tire’s maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver’s field of vision. R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for
the first 60 miles (100 km). R Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. R When replacing with tires that do not fea
ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.
For more information on wheels and tires, con tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 313) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity,
speed rating and load index (/ page 320) R Tire pressure table (/ page 308) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 334)
Notes on rotating wheels
& WARNING Risk of injury through differ ent wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tires have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteris tics. The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com ponents may also be damaged.
Wheels and tires 327
# Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimen sions.
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of
the tire R Rear wheels wear more at the center of the
tire
Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on «Changing a wheel» when doing so (/ page 329).
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tire-change tool kit
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers. Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack R Chock
R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt
The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag1 in the cargo compartment.
The tool bag contains: R Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R Folding chock R Ratchet for jack
328 Wheels and tires
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements: R The required tire-change tool is available. If
your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
# Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position. # Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shift into positionj. # Switch off the engine. # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
# Remove the hub caps if necessary (/ page 329).
# Raise the vehicle (/ page 329).
Removing and installing hub caps
Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 329).
Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub
cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap.
# To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise.
# Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 329).
R The hub caps have been removed (/ page 329).
Important notes on using the jack: R Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and
holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti
cally under the jack support point.
Wheels and tires 329
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: R Never place your hands or feet under the
vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the engine and do not release
the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail
gate.
# Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com pletely.
Position of jack support points
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec ognize dangers.
& WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri
ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned
330 Wheels and tires
vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.
* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup port points.
# Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters «AUF» are visible.
# Position jack2 at jack support point1. # Turn ratchet3 clockwise until jack2 sits
completely on jack support point1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
# Turn ratchet3 until the tire is raised a maxi mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
# Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 331).
Removing a wheel
Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 329).
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.
* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
# Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.
# Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com pletely.
Wheels and tires 331
# Screw alignment bolt1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
# Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com pletely.
# Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store it in the cargo compartment.
# Notes on removing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 334).
Mounting a new wheel
Requirements: R The wheel is removed (/ page 331).
& WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel
Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv ing. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
# Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam aged hub threads replaced.
# Do not continue driving.
# Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 325).
For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc tion of rotation when installing.
# Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
# Notes on installing an emergency spare wheel (/ page 334).
& WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
# Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on «Changing a wheel» (/ page 325).
# For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes- Benz and for the wheel in question.
332 Wheels and tires
* NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt
If the wheel has too much play when screw ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the
wheel hub when screwing on the first wheel bolt.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.
# Unscrew the alignment bolt. # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight. # Lower the vehicle (/ page 333).
Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change
Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed
(/ page 332).
# To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let ters «AB» are visible and turn the ratchet of the jack to the left.
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 with a maximum of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated1 to5 the specified tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
& WARNING Risk of injury through incor rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # Ensure that the wheel bolts or nuts are
tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
# If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor que checked immediately.
# Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.
# Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn ing system (/ page 312). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
Wheels and tires 333
# Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 311). Exception: the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel
& WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions
The wheel or tire size and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
# Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.
# Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size briefly.
# Do not switch off ESP. # Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.
% The deflated emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the cargo compartment and is secured to the adjustable cargo compartment floor in the lower position.
Observe the following notes on removing an emergency spare wheel: R Before stowing the emergency spare wheel,
make sure there is no air left in the tire. If necessary, allow the air to escape.
R To release air from the tire: remove the valve cap of the tire. R Press down the metal insert in the valve
using a pointed object, e.g. a pen. R Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R Check the tire pressure of the emergency
spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. R The maximum permissible speed with an
emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not install snow chains on the emergency
spare wheel. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
% Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure loss warning sys tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
334 Wheels and tires
Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring sys tem cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 306) R Tire and Loading Information placard
(/ page 313) R Tire pressure table (/ page 308) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 325)
Inflating the emergency spare wheel
* NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla tion compressor running too long
# Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.
Requirements: Comply with the manufacturer’s safety notes on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel and on the tire inflation compressor. # Remove sticker with the label 50 mph
(80 km/h )from the tire inflation compressor housing and affix it to the instrument cluster within the driver’s field of vision.
# Remove the tire inflation compressor from the storage space under the cargo compart ment floor (/ page 287).
# Pull filler hose1 and plug3 out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
# Insert plug7 of filler hose1 in the socket on the tire inflation compressor and then turn it until plug7 engages.
# Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer gency spare wheel.
# Screw union nut2 of filler hose1 onto valve .
# Make sure on and off switch4 of the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.
# Insert plug3 in a socket in your vehicle. R 12 V socket: (/ page 120)
Wheels and tires 335
R Observe the notes on sockets: (/ page 120)
# Press the start/stop button once to switch on the power supply. (/ page 143)
# Press On/Off switch4 on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown on manometer5.
# Pump the tire to the specified tire pressure.
% The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
# When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on and off switch4 on the tire inflation compressor to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
# Press the start/stop button to switch off the power supply.
# If the tire pressure is higher than the speci fied pressure, press pressure release valve button6 until the correct tire pressure has been reached.
# Unscrew union nut2 of filler hose1 from the valve.
# Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare wheel onto the valve again.
# Store filler hose1 and plug3 in the lower section of the tire inflation compressor hous ing.
# Store the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.
336 Wheels and tires
Notes on technical data The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicle electronics Two-way radios
Notes on installing two-way radios
& WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of accident from incor rect operation of two-way radios
If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation could interfere with the on-board electronics, for example, if: R The tow-way radio is not connected to an
exterior antenna R If the exterior antenna is not correctly
mounted or is not of low reflection
This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior
antenna installed at a qualified special ist workshop.
# When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.
* NOTE Invalidation of the operating per mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out
put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions.
Technical data 337
1 Front roof area 2 Rear roof area 3 Rear fenders
On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you install the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles «EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment») when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer’s supplements when installing.
Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.
Frequency band and maximum transmission output
Frequency band Maximum transmis sion output
Short wave 3 — 54 MHz
100 W
4 m frequency band 74 — 88 MHz
30 W
2 m frequency band 144 — 174 MHz
50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 — 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm frequency band 420 — 450 MHz
35 W
Two-way radio (2G/3G/4G)
10 W
338 Technical data
The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW R RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 — 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for some wavebands. R Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) R 70 cm frequency band R 2G/3G/4G
Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview
Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate (USA only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
Technical data 339
Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 2 Maximum permissible front axle load 3 Maximum permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number)
The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).
Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
VIN, engine number and other signs
1 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 VIN (vehicle identification number) stamped
into the crossmember
3 Plate with information about emissions test ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California
4 VIN as a label at the lower edge of the wind shield
Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids
& WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health
Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con
tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids.
# Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers.
# Always keep children away from operat ing fluids.
340 Technical data
+ ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre sponsible disposal
# Dispose of operating fluids in an envi ronmentally responsible manner.
Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating fluids is available at the following locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids by entering the designation — At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com — In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
& WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, open flames, smoking and creation
of sparks must be avoided. # Switch off the ignition and, if available,
the stationary heater, before and while refueling the vehicle.
& WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.
# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
# Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during
the refueling process.
If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with
soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your
eyes, immediately rinse them thor oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
# If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten tion immediately. Do not induce vomit ing.
# Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.
Technical data 341
Fuel
Notes on fuel grades for vehicles with gaso line engines Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
* NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur unleaded
fuel.
This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by
volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by
volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
R Gasoline with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch the ignition on. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 162). Otherwise engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased. If you want maximum engine output: only refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also refuel with unleaded regular gasoline with at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption.
Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON.
* NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline
Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair lon gevity and performance. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with
unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre mium grade gasoline.
# Do not drive at the maximum design speed.
# Avoid sudden acceleration engine speeds over 3000 rpm.
Further information on fuel is available at the fol lowing locations: R At a gas station
342 Technical data
R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Information on additives in gasoline Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
* NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Residue could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Be sure to observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Tank content and reserve fuel
Model Total capacity
GLB 250 13.7 gal (52.0 liters)
GLB 250 4MATIC 15.9 gal (60.0 liters)
Model of which reserve fuel
All models 1.6 gal (6.0 liters)
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
* NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi tives
# Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
# Do not use additives. # Have the engine oil changed after the
prescribed intervals.
Technical data 343
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Quality and capacity of engine oil
Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval
All models 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 229.71*
* Recommended for lowest possible fuel con sumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes). To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed. The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
All models 1.5 gal (5.5 liters)
Notes on brake fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys tem
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the
specified intervals.
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.
Coolant
Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before
adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze
from component parts before starting the vehicle.
344 Technical data
* NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool ant
# Only add coolant that has been pre mixed with the required antifreeze pro tection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Operating Fluids 310.1: — At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com — In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop
* NOTE Overheating at high outside tem peratures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Always use coolant approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
# Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper ating Fluids 310.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system should be: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection
down to approximately -35 F (-37 C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 F (-45 C))
Coolant capacity
Model Capacity
All models 9.4 US qt (8.9 liters)
Notes on windshield washer fluid
Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
& WARNING Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.
* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid
Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam age the plastic surface of the exterior light ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which
is also suitable for use on plastic surfa ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter Fit.
Technical data 345
* NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids
# Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win terFit with other windshield washer flu ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa tion on the antifreeze container. Mix the washer fluid with the windshield washer fluid all year round.
Refrigerant
Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 340).
* NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger ant
If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli mate control system may be damaged. # USA/China: Use only R134a refriger
ant. # Canada: Use only R1234yf refrigerant.
* NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com pressor oil
# Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
# Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger ant compressor oil.
Work on the climate control system may be car ried out only by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label on the climate control sys tem for the refrigerant type and the refrigerant
compressor oil is located on the inside of the hood.
Information label (example USA/China) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig
erant used 6 Refrigerant type
346 Technical data
Information label (example Canada) 1 Hazard and service warning symbols 2 Refrigerant filling capacity 3 Applicable standards 4 PAG oil part number 5 GWP (Global Warming Potential) of the refrig
erant used 6 Refrigerant type
Symbols1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R The need to have service work carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop only
Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil
Model Refrigerant
All models 24.3 0.4 oz (690 10 g)
Model PAG oil
All models 2.8 0.4 oz (80 10 g)
Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions
The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R tires R load R condition of the suspension R optional equipment
Height when opened and headroom
Model 1 Height when opened
2 Head room
All models 82 in (2079 mm)
76 in (1924 mm)
Technical data 347
Vehicle dimensions
All models
Vehicle length 182 in (4634 mm)
Vehicle width including out side mirrors
80 in (2020 mm)
Vehicle height 65 in (1660 mm)
Wheelbase 111 in (2829 mm)
Turning radius 38.39 ft (11.70 m)
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci fied vehicle data: R Items of optional equipment increase the
curb weight and reduce the payload.
Model Maximum roof load
All models 165 lb (75 kg)
Off-road driving
Angle of approach/departure The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are ready to drive. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter rain (/ page 150).
Model 1 Front 2 Rear
All models 20.1 25
Maximum gradient climbing ability The vehicle’s gradient climbing ability depends on the weight distribution in the vehicle, the ter rain conditions and the road surface conditions. The specified value applies in the following cases: R the vehicle is ready to drive R the road surface conditions and thus traction
are good
A gradient climbing ability of 100% corresponds to an incline of 45. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous ter rain (/ page 150). Missing values were not yet available at the time of going to press.
348 Technical data
Model Maximum gra dient climbing
ability
All models
Technical data 349
Display messages Introduction
Notes about display messages Display messages appear on the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic symbols are sim plified in the Operator’s Manual and may differ from the symbols on the multifunction display. The multifunction display shows high-priority dis play messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator’s Manual. For some display messages, a symbol will also be shown: R Further information R Hide display message
With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Press the symbol to show further infor
mation on the multifunction display. Press the symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing theP button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid den. The multifunction display shows these dis play messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.
Calling up saved display messages On-board computer: 4 Service 5 1 Message If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the multifunction display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip
ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
# To exit the message memory: press the P button.
350 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
6 SRS Malfunction Service Required
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)
* The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example)
* The corresponding window curtain airbag is malfunctioning (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag
The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 351
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Front Passenger Airbag Dis- abled See Operator’s Man- ual
* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle’s interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 46). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual
* The front passenger airbag is enabled while the vehicle is in motion: R even when a child, a person of smaller stature or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is
located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
352 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag may deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a child restraint system facing to the rear on a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 46). # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator’s Manual
* The PRESAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 353
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Obtain a New Key
* The SmartKey needs to be replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace Key Battery
* The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 67).
Key Not Detected (white display message)
* The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey
(/ page 144).
354 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Key Not Detected (red dis play message)
* The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R You can no longer start the engine. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
# Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle.
If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 144).
Place the Key in the Marked Space See Opera- tor’s Manual
* SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 144).
Don’t Forget Your Key
* A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 355
Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
: Check Left Low Beam (example)
* The corresponding light source is faulty. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting
diodes in the light are faulty.
: Malfunction See Opera- tors Manual
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
: Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative
* The light sensor is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
356 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
: Active Headlamps Inopera- tive
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
: Switch On Headlamps
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or position.
: Switch Off Lights
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the position.
: Intell. Light System Inoper- ative
* The Intelligent Light System is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the func tions of the Intelligent Light System. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 357
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 128). # Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunctioning
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting
* You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition, secure the vehicle against rolling away and take the Smart
Key with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12 V
battery may discharge and it will then be possible to start the vehicle only with the aid of a second battery (starting assistance).
358 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator’s Manual
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Opera- tor’s Manual
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle’s operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Steering Malfunction See Operator’s Manual
* The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle’s operating safety is jeopardized.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 359
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not con tinue driving under any circumstances.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel
* The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering. # Switch off the ignition. # To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the left and right. # Switch the ignition back on.
C * At least one door is open. # Close all doors.
? * The hood is open.
& WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked
The hood may open and block your view.
360 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Close the hood.
A * The tailgate is open.
& DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.
# Close the tailgate.
_ 2nd Seat Row, Left Not Locked
* The left-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (/ page 95). # Make sure that the seat is engaged (/ page 95).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 361
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
_ 2nd Seat Row, Right Not Locked
* The right-hand seat or the seat backrest in the second row of seats is not engaged. # Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages and push the row of seats back (/ page 95). # Make sure that the seat is engaged (/ page 95).
Check Washer Fluid
* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 275).
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop but- ton for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times.
* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the engine while driving (/ page 144).
362 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
+ Check Coolant Level See Operator’s Manual
* The coolant level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.
# Add coolant (/ page 275). # Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehi- cle Turn Engine Off
* The coolant is too hot. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 363
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
* The fan motor is faulty. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that
the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.
Fuel Level Low
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
Gas Cap Loose
* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Only Shift to ‘P’ when Vehi- cle is Stationary
* Park positionj can be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary.
364 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Apply Brake to Shift from ‘P’
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh,k or neutrali.
To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine
* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park positionj or neutrali and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Change the transmission position. # Start the engine.
Apply Brake to Shift to D or R
* You have attempted to select transmission positionh ork. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionh ork.
Apply Brake to Shift to ‘R’ * You have attempted to select transmission positionk. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission positionk.
Driver’s Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away
* The driver’s door is not fully closed and transmission positionh,k or neutrali is selected. # Select park positionj when switching off the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 365
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away
* While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, neutrali has been engaged. # To stop, depress the brake pedal. # Shift the transmission to park positionj while the vehicle is stationary. # To continue driving, select transmission positionh ork.
Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be changed. # When transmission positionh is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans
mission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Possible Service Required
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission positionk cannot be selected. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutrali automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park positionj. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc- tion
* The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
366 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Until then, always select park positionj manually before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears. # Let the transmission cool down. # If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
d Transmission Oil Overhea- ted Drive with Caution
* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Parking Brake
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The park positionj cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Teaching in Transmission Operate Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away
* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away. # Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in process. # Switch on the ignition. # Select park positionj, transmission positionk or neutrali.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling Away See Opera- tor’s Manual
* The transmission position cannot be reliably identified. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Teaching in Transmission Complete
* The transmission’s teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.
Transmission Malfunction Service Required
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Opera- tor’s Manual
* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 170).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow! indicator lamp and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 170). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 169). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 170).
To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the redF (USA only) or! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow! indicator lamp is lit and the redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Can ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the charge level is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery.
370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
To apply: # switch the ignition off.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If the electric parking brake is not to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being towed, leave the ignition switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 170).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 170).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake
* The redF indicator lamp (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 169). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 170).
# Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. # Release the electric parking brake manually.
372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only) Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake
* The redF (USA only) or! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch on the ignition.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level
* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Check Brake Pads See Operator’s Manual
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
ATTENTION ASSIST Inoper- ative
* ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 213). # If necessary, take a break.
374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph
* The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle’s handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive at speeds greater than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 191). # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera’s field of vision. # Check the tire pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist Inop- erative
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 191). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Beginning Emergency Stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. An emergency stop is being initiated (/ page 195). # Put your hands back on the steering wheel.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
You can cancel the deceleration at any time by performing one of the following actions: R Steering R Depressing the brake or accelerator pedal R Pressing a steering-wheel button R Operating Touch Control R Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Active Steering Asst. Cur- rently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the ignition off and switch it back on.
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 219). # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 217). # Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Blind Spot Assist Inopera- tive
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 217). # Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator’s Manual
* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Traffic Sign Assist Inopera- tive
* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty
* The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R dirt on the sensors R heavy rain or snow R extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors (/ page 280). # Restart the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
_ Currently Unavailable Cam- era View Restricted
* The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera’s field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the windshield in front of the camera
% Condensation detected on the windshield will be automatically removed using a built-in heater within approx imately 12 minutes.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield if necessary.
Off
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 196).
380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Inoperative
* The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Not in Curr. Drive Prog.
* The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program. # Change the drive program (/ page 154).
Max. Speed 25 mph
* The maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded. # Drive more slowly.
— — — mph
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 187).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Suspended
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC setting, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 185).
Off
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 187).
Active Distance Assist Cur- rently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 185). # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
Active Distance Assist Inop- erative
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist Now Available
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (/ page 187).
382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
— — — mph
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 182).
Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 182).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383
Driving safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
! Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* ABS and ESP are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
! Inoperative See Operator’s Manual
* ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual
* ESP is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).
# If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
Inoperative See Operator’s Manual
* ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
T ! Inoperative See Operator’s Manual
* EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Brake Assist Func- tions Currently Limited See Operator’s Manual
* Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 177). # Drive on.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart
the engine.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Active Brake Assist Func- tions Limited See Opera- tor’s Manual
* Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering Assist or PRESAFE PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes me connect
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Mercedes me connect Services Limited See Oper- ator’s Manual
* The vehicle functions for malfunction detection are restricted. At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on the diagnostics connection (/ page 27). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
G Inoperative
* At least one of the main functions of the Mercedes me connect system or of the SOS emergency call system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Battery
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# 12 V Battery See Opera- tor’s Manual
* The engine is off and the charge level is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.
To charge the battery: # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance.
* If the message appears while the engine is running, this indicates an on-board electrical system malfunction. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# See Operator’s Manual
* The battery is not being charged.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Stop Vehicle See Opera- tor’s Manual
* The battery is no longer being charged and the charge level is too low.
* NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
# Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any cir cumstances.
# Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running
* The battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the engine running. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Tire pressure monitor
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tire Press. Monitor Cur- rently Unavailable
* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensor are being received. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.
Tire Press. Monitor Inopera- tive
* The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inop- erative No Wheel Sensors
* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing
* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
h Check Tires
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 306) and the tires.
h Please Correct Tire Pres- sure
* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 311).
392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
h Warning Tire Malfunction
* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire
R The tires can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive on with a flat tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.
Notes on flat tires (/ page 285). # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires.
Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.
& WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires
Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Tire pressure loss warning system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Check Tire Pressure Soon * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure (/ page 306) and the tires. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 312).
Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator
* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 312).
Run Flat Indicator Inopera- tive
* Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395
Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)
* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 274).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 343).
5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level
* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too high.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
# Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off
* Display message only for certain engines: The engine oil level is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil
# Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 274). # Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 343).
5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine
* Display message only for certain engines: The oil pressure is too low.
* NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure
# Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.
# Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the ignition is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the engine has been star ted or during a journey.
Instrument Display (standard) Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Display
Depending on the display setting, the positions of the indicator lamps on the Instrument Display may differ from the example shown.
398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Indicator and warning lamps: 6 Restraint system (/ page 400) Seat belt (/ page 400) Electric power steering
(/ page 401) Vehicles with a Widescreen Cock
pit: coolant temperature (/ page 402)
; Check Engine (/ page 402) # Electrical malfunction (/ page 402) Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca
tion indicator (/ page 402) F USA: electric parking brake (red)
(/ page 405) ! Canada: electric parking brake (red)
(/ page 405) ! Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 405) $ USA: brakes (red) (/ page 405) J Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 405) L Distance warning (/ page 407)
! ABS (/ page 407) ESP(/ page 407) ESP OFF (/ page 407) h Tire pressure monitor (/ page 410) T Parking lamps (/ page 125) L Low beam (/ page 125) K High beam (/ page 126) #! Turn signal lights (/ page 126) N Front fog lamps (/ page 125) R Rear fog lamp (/ page 125)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
6 Restraint system warning lamp
The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 36).
& WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Drive on carefully. # Note the messages on the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes
The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. *The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt(/ page 39).
*There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up
The red seat belt warning lamp will light up for six seconds once the engine has started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. *The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 39).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Electric power steering warning lamp (red)
The red electric power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
& WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle’s operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Coolant warning lamp
The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.
& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood
If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.
# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. or # Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level (/ page 275). # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below the red area.
; Engine diagnosis warning lamp
The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Electrical malfunction warn ing lamp
The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. * There is a fault in the electrics. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. *There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak ing. # Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up
The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel.
404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
F Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (USA only)
! Electric parking brake indi cator lamp (red) (Canada only)
! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp
The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp also lights up in the event of a malfunction. * # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$ Brake warning lamp (USA only)
J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)
The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
# Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level
If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid.
406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
L Warning lamp for distance warning function
The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. *The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 177).
Driving safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
! ABS warning lamp
The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
& WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP warning lamp flashes
The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. * One or more wheels has reached its grip limit (/ page 174). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
ESP warning lamp lights up
The yellow ESP warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ESP is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the multifunction display.
& WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning
If ESP is malfunctioning, ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Drive on carefully. # Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP OFF warning lamp
The yellow ESP OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. *ESP is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
& WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP deactivated
ESP does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP cannot be activated, ESP is malfunctioning. # Have ESP checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP (/ page 174).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409
Tire pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes
The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. *The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
& WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up
The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. *The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.
& WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure
R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures.
410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
# Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
# Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411
1, 2, 3 … 4MATIC …………………………………………….. 162
Function ………………………………………. 162 12 V battery
see Battery (vehicle) 12 V socket
see Socket (12 V) 115 V socket
see Socket (115 V) 360 Camera ……………………………………. 205
Function ………………………………………. 205 Opening the camera cover (rear view camera) ……………………………………….. 208 Selecting a view ……………………………. 207
A A/C function
Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) …………………………….. 140 Switching on/off (control panel) ……… 139
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) …………. 173 Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident and breakdown manage ment
Mercedes me connect ……………………. 252 Acoustic locking verification signal
Activating/deactivating ……………………. 66 Active Blind Spot Assist …………………….. 217
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 219 Brake application …………………………… 218 Function ……………………………………….. 217 System limitations …………………………. 217
Active Brake Assist Function/notes …………………………….. 177 Setting …………………………………………. 181
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC …….. 185 Active Emergency Stop Assist …………. 195 Active Lane Change Assist ……………… 193 Calling up a speed …………………………. 187 Function ………………………………………. 185 Increasing/decreasing speed ………….. 187 Requirements ……………………………….. 187 Route-based speed adaptation ………… 190 Steering wheel buttons …………………… 187 Storing a speed …………………………….. 187 Switching off/deactivating ……………… 187
Switching on/activating …………………. 187 System limitations …………………………. 185
Active Emergency Stop Assist …………… 195 Active Lane Change Assist ………………… 193
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 195 Function ………………………………………. 193
Active Lane Keeping Assist ………………… 219 Activating/deactivating ………………….. 221 Activating/deactivating the warning …. 221 Function ……………………………………….. 219 Setting the sensitivity …………………….. 221 System limits ………………………………… 219
Active Parking Assist ………………………… 208 Cross Traffic Alert ………………………….. 213 Drive Away Assist ………………………….. 212 Exiting a parking space …………………… 211 Function ………………………………………. 208 Maneuvering assistance …………………. 213 Parking ………………………………………… 209 System limitations …………………………. 208
Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS
Active Speed Limit Assist ………………….. 189 Display …………………………………………. 189
412 Index
Function ………………………………………. 189 Active Steering Assist ……………………….. 191
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 193 Active Emergency Stop Assist …………. 195 Active Lane Change Assist ……………… 193 Function ……………………………………….. 191 System limits ………………………………… 191
Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function ………………………………………. 128 Switching on/off …………………………… 129
Additives ………………………………………….. 343 Engine oil …………………………………….. 343 Fuel …………………………………………….. 343
Additives (engine oil) see Additives
Additives (fuel) see Fuel
Adjustable cargo compartment floor ….. 118 After-sales service center
see ASSYST PLUS
Air bag Reduced protection …………………………. 43
Air conditioning menu Calling up …………………………………….. 140
Air distribution Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ….. 140
Air inlet see Air-water duct
Air pressure see Tire pressure
Air vents …………………………………………… 141 Adjusting (front) …………………………….. 141 Adjusting (rear) ……………………………… 142
Air vents see Air vents
Air-recirculation mode ……………………….. 141 Air-water duct …………………………………… 276
Keeping free …………………………………. 276 Airbag ………………………………………………… 41
Activation ………………………………………. 36 Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ….. 41 Installation locations ………………………… 41 Knee airbag …………………………………….. 41
Overview ………………………………………… 41 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ….. 46 Protection ………………………………………. 42 Side airbag ……………………………………… 41 Window curtain airbag ……………………… 41
Alarm see Panic alarm
Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
All-wheel drive see 4MATIC
Ambient lighting Setting (multimedia system) ……………. 130
Android Auto see Smartphone integration
Animals Pets in the vehicle …………………………… 63
Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains see Snow chains
Anti-theft protection Immobilizer …………………………………….. 85
Index 413
Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)
Apple CarPlay see Smartphone integration
Assistance systems see Driving safety system
ASSYST PLUS ……………………………………. 270 Battery disconnection periods …………. 271 Displaying the service due date ……….. 270 Function/notes …………………………….. 270 Regular maintenance work ……………… 270 Special service requirements ………….. 270
ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ……………… 85 Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor ………………………………… 87 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm …………………………………………….. 87 Deactivating the alarm …………………….. 86 Function ………………………………………… 85 Function of the interior motion sensor .. 87 The tow-away alarm function …………….. 86
ATTENTION ASSIST …………………….. 213, 215 Function ……………………………………….. 213 Setting …………………………………………. 215 System limitations …………………………. 213
Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop
Automatic car wash mode Activating …………………………………….. 278
Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Automatic driving lights ……………………. 126 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) …………………………………… 152 Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ stop function) …………………………………… 152 Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff …………………………………… 44, 46
Function of the automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff ………….. 44
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ….. 46 Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff
see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Automatic measures after an accident … 49 Automatic mirror folding function
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 138 Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever ……………………… 157 Drive program display …………………….. 155 Drive programs ……………………………… 154 DYNAMIC SELECT switch ……………….. 154 Engaging drive position ………………….. 159 Engaging neutral ……………………………. 158 Engaging park position …………………… 158 Engaging reverse gear ……………………. 158 Kickdown ……………………………………… 161 Manual gearshifting ……………………….. 159 Steering wheel paddle shifters ………… 159 Transmission position display ………….. 157 Transmission positions …………………… 157
Automatic transmission (problem) see Transmission (problem)
414 Index
B Back seat
see Third row of seats Bag hook …………………………………………… 117 Baidu CarLife
see Smartphone integration
BAS (Brake Assist System) ………………… 174 Battery
SmartKey ……………………………………….. 67 Battery
see Battery (vehicle) Battery (vehicle) ……………………………….. 296
Charging ………………………………………. 295 Charging (Remote Online) ……………….. 145 Notes ………………………………………….. 292 Notes (starting assistance and charging) ……………………………………… 294 Replacing …………………………………….. 296 Starting assistance ………………………… 295
Belt see Seat belt
Blind Spot Assist ……………………………….. 217 Activating/deactivating ………………….. 219 Function ……………………………………….. 217 System limitations …………………………. 217
Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid Notes ………………………………………….. 344
Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion) …………………………………………….. 176
Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ……….. 173 Active Brake Assist ………………………… 177 BAS (Brake Assist System) ………………. 174 Driving tips …………………………………… 147 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion) …………………………………………….. 176 HOLD function ………………………………. 196 Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads) ………………………………………….. 147 New/replaced brakepads/brake discs ……………………………………………. 146 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ….. 146
Post-collision brake …………………………. 49 Braking assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown
Changing a wheel ………………………….. 329 Overview of the help functions ………….. 18 Roadside Assistance ………………………… 24 Tow-starting ………………………………….. 301 Towing away …………………………………. 298 Transporting the vehicle …………………. 299
Breakdown see Flat tire
Buttons Steering wheel ……………………………… 225
C Calls
Mercedes me ……………………………….. 253 Camera
see 360 Camera see Rear view camera
Car key see SmartKey
Index 415
Car wash see Care
Car wash (care) …………………………………. 276 Car-to-X-Communication
Displaying hazard warnings …………….. 247 Care …………………………………………………. 281
Air-water duct ……………………………….. 276 Automatic car wash ……………………….. 276 Carpet …………………………………………. 281 Decorative foil ………………………………. 279 Display …………………………………………. 281 Exterior lighting …………………………….. 280 Headliner ……………………………………… 281 Matte finish ………………………………….. 279 Paintwork …………………………………….. 279 Plastic trim …………………………………… 281 Power washer ……………………………….. 278 Real wood/trim elements ……………….. 281 Rear view camera ………………………….. 280 Seat belts …………………………………….. 281 Seat cover ……………………………………. 281 Sensors ……………………………………….. 280 Surround view camera …………………… 280 Tailpipes ………………………………………. 280 Washing by hand …………………………… 279
Wheels/rims ………………………………… 280 Windows ………………………………………. 280 Wiper blades ………………………………… 280
Cargo compartment cover Extending/retracting ……………………… 114 Notes …………………………………………… 113 Removing/installing ……………………….. 114
Cargo compartment floor Adjustable …………………………………….. 118
Cargo tie-down rings …………………………. 117 Carpet (Care) …………………………………….. 281 Change of address ………………………………. 24 Change of ownership ………………………….. 24 Changing a wheel
Preparation ………………………………….. 329 Raising the vehicle ………………………… 329
Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Changing gears …………………………………. 159 Manually ………………………………………. 159
Changing hub caps …………………………… 329
Charging Battery (vehicle) ……………………………. 295 USB port ………………………………………. 121
Child safety lock Rear doors ……………………………………… 62 Rear side windows …………………………… 63
Child seat Attaching (notes) …………………………….. 54 Basic instructions ……………………………. 50 Front-passenger seat (notes) …………….. 60 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ………… 55 Notes on risks and dangers ………………. 51 Securing on the front passenger seat …. 61 Securing on the rear seat …………………. 59 Top Tether ………………………………………. 58
Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle ………….. 51 Basic instructions ……………………………. 50 Special seat belt retractor ………………… 55
Chock ………………………………………………. 328 Storage location ……………………………. 328
Chock see Chock
416 Index
Cleaning see Care
Climate control Activating/deactivating ………………….. 139 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel) ………………….. 139 Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system) … 140 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (control panel) ………. 140 Activating/deactivating the synchro nization function (MBUX multimedia system) ………………………………………… 140 Air-recirculation mode ……………………. 141 Automatic control ………………………….. 140 Calling up the air conditioning menu … 140 Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control ……………………………… 139 Filling capacity for PAG oil ………………. 347 Front air vents ……………………………….. 141 Note ……………………………………………. 139 Rear air vents ……………………………….. 142 Refrigerant …………………………………… 346 Refrigerant filling capacity ………………. 347
Removing condensation from the windows ……………………………………….. 141 Residual heat ………………………………… 141 Setting (MBUX multimedia system) ….. 140 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening) ………………………………………… 79
Coat hook …………………………………………. 118 Coat hook on the tailgate …………………… 118 Cockpit ………………………………………………… 6
Overview …………………………………………. 6 Coffee cup symbol
see ATTENTION ASSIST Collision detection (parked vehicle) …… 170 Combination switch ………………………….. 126 Computer
see On-board computer Consumption indicator
Calling up …………………………………….. 157 Convenience closing feature ……………….. 80 Convenience opening ………………………….. 79 Coolant (engine)
Capacity ………………………………………. 345
Check level …………………………………… 275 Notes ………………………………………….. 344
Copyrights License ………………………………………….. 33 Trademarks …………………………………….. 34
Cornering light ………………………………….. 128 Cross Traffic Alert ……………………………… 213 Crosswind Assist
Function/notes ……………………………… 176 Cruise control …………………………………… 182
Buttons ………………………………………… 182 Calling up a speed …………………………. 182 Function ………………………………………. 182 Requirements: ………………………………. 182 Selecting ……………………………………… 182 Setting a speed …………………………….. 182 Storing a speed …………………………….. 182 Switching off ………………………………… 182 Switching on …………………………………. 182 System limitations …………………………. 182
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ……… 28 Customer Relations Department …………. 28
Index 417
D Damping adjustment ………………………… 198 Dashboard
see Cockpit Data acquisition
Vehicle ………………………………………….. 30 Data storage
Electronic control units ……………………. 30 Online services ……………………………….. 32 Vehicle ………………………………………….. 30
Deactivating the alarm (ATA) ……………….. 86 Dealership
see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity
Wireless vehicle components ……………. 26 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions) …………………………………………………………. 279 Definitions (tires and loading) …………… 322 Destination entry ……………………………… 244
Entering a POI or address ……………….. 244 Detecting inattentiveness
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Diagnostics connection ………………………. 27 Digital Operator’s Manual …………………… 20 Dinghy towing
see Tow-bar system DIRECT SELECT lever …………………………. 157
Engaging drive position ………………….. 159 Engaging neutral ……………………………. 158 Engaging park position …………………… 158 Engaging park position automatically .. 158 Engaging reverse gear ……………………. 158 Function ………………………………………. 157
Display (Care) ……………………………………. 281 Display (MBUX multimedia system)
Home screen ………………………………… 231 Display (multimedia system) …………….. 232
Operating …………………………………….. 232 Display (on-board computer)
Displays on the multifunction display .. 227 Display message ………………………………. 350
Calling up (on-board computer) ……….. 350 Notes ………………………………………….. 350
Display messages — — — mph ………………………………. 383 — — — mph ……………………………….. 381 _ 2nd Seat Row, Left Not Locked .. 361 _ 2nd Seat Row, Right Not Locked ………………………………………… 362 # 12 V Battery See Operator’s Manual ………………………………………… 389 : Active Headlamps Inoperative …. 357 ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative .. 374 ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! ………………………………………….. 374 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative …………………………………… 356 Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel ………………………. 360 $ Check Brake Fluid Level …………. 373 # Check Brake Pads See Opera tor’s Manual ………………………………….. 374
418 Index
+ Check Coolant Level See Oper ator’s Manual ……………………………….. 363 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) ………………………………………….. 396 : Check Left Low Beam (exam ple) ……………………………………………… 356 h Check Tires ………………………….. 392 Check Washer Fluid ………………. 362 Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off ……………………………… 363 _ Currently Unavailable Camera View Restricted …………………………….. 380 Currently Unavailable Radar Sensors Dirty ……………………………….. 379 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual …………………………. 384 Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual …………………………. 385 Don’t Forget Your Key ……………. 355
5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured …………………………………….. 398 5 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehi cle Turn Engine Off ………………………… 397 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Engine ………………………….. 397 5 Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level …….. 396 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) ………………………… 351 Fuel Level Low ………………………. 364 Gas Cap Loose ……………………… 364 ! Inoperative See Operator’s Manual ………………………………………… 385 Inoperative See Operator’s Manual ………………………………………… 386 T Inoperative See Operator’s Manual ………………………………………… 387 G Inoperative …………………………… 388 Inoperative …………………………… 381 : Intell. Light System Inoperative .. 357
Key Not Detected (red display message) ……………………………………… 355 Key Not Detected (white dis play message) ………………………………. 354 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal function Service Required (example) … 351 Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph …………………………………………….. 375 : Malfunction See Operators Manual ………………………………………… 356 Max. Speed 25 mph ………………. 381 Not in Curr. Drive Prog. ………….. 381 Obtain a New Key ………………….. 354 Off ………………………………………. 382 Off ………………………………………. 380 F Parking Brake See Operator’s Manual ………………………………………… 369 h Please Correct Tire Pressure …… 392 F Please Release Parking Brake ….. 372 Replace Key Battery ………………. 354
Index 419
# See Operator’s Manual ………….. 389 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required ………………………………………. 351 Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator’s Man ual ………………………………………………. 359 Steering Malfunction See Oper ator’s Manual ……………………………….. 359 Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator’s Manual … 359 # Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run ning …………………………………………….. 390 # Stop Vehicle See Operator’s Manual ………………………………………… 390 Suspended …………………………… 382 : Switch Off Lights …………………… 357 : Switch On Headlamps ……………. 357 d Transmission Oil Overheated Drive with Caution …………………………. 367
F Turn On the Ignition to Release the Parking Brake ………………………….. 373 d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting …………. 358 h Warning Tire Malfunction ……….. 393 h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing ………… 391 Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual ….. 377 Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative …. 377 Active Brake Assist Functions Cur rently Limited See Operator’s Man ual ………………………………………………. 387 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi ted See Operator’s Manual ……………… 388 Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual ….. 382 Active Distance Assist Inoperative …… 382 Active Distance Assist Now Available ……………………………………………………. 382
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual ….. 376 Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera tive ………………………………………………. 376 Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera tor’s Manual …………………………………. 378 Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual ….. 375 Active Steering Assist Inoperative ……. 375 Active Steering Asst. Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer gency Stops ………………………………….. 376 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator’s Manual ….. 358 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera tive ……………………………………………… 358 Apply Brake to Shift from ‘P’ …………… 365 Apply Brake to Shift to ‘R’ ………………. 365 Apply Brake to Shift to D or R ………….. 365
420 Index
Apply Parking Brake Risk of Rolling Away See Operator’s Manual ………….. 368 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction ………….. 366 Beginning Emergency Stop ……………… 375 Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila ble See Operator’s Manual ……………… 377 Blind Spot Assist Inoperative …………… 377 Check Tire Pressure Soon ………………. 394 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator ………………………….. 395 Cruise Control Inoperative ……………… 383 Cruise Control Off …………………………. 383 Decrease Speed ……………………………. 394 Driver’s Door Open & Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. 365 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual …………………………. 352 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Manual …………………………. 352
Hazard Warning Flashers Malfunc tioning …………………………………………. 358 Mercedes me connect Services Limi ted See Operator’s Manual ……………… 388 N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling Away …………………………………………… 366 Only Shift to ‘P’ when Vehicle is Sta tionary …………………………………………. 364 Parking Lock Inoperative Apply Park ing Brake ……………………………………… 367 Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator’s Manual …………………… 355 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera tor’s Manual …………………………………. 353 Reversing Not Possible Service Required ………………………………………. 366 Run Flat Indicator Inoperative …………. 395 Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer …………………………………… 366 Teaching in Transmission Complete …. 368
Teaching in Transmission Operate Selector Lever Apply Brake for XX s Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away ……………. 367 Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable …………………………………… 391 Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ………… 391 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors ………………………………. 391 Tires Overheated …………………………… 393 To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine ……………………………. 365 To switch engine off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec onds or press 3 times. ……………………. 362 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail able See Operator’s Manual ……………. 378 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative …………. 378 Transmission Malfunction ……………….. 367 Transmission Malfunction Service Required ………………………………………. 368
Index 421
Transmission Malfunction Stop ……….. 366
Display on the windshield see Head-up Display
Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Door Child safety lock (rear doors) ……………. 62 Locking (emergency key) ………………….. 71 Opening (from the inside) …………………. 68 Unlocking (emergency key) ……………….. 71 Unlocking (from the inside) ………………. 68
Door control panel ………………………………. 16 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) … 318 Downhill driving assistance
see DSR Drawbar
see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving ………………………….. 147 Drive Away Assist ……………………………… 212
Drive Away Assist see Protection against collision
Drive position Inserting ………………………………………. 159
Drive program display ……………………….. 155 Drive programs
see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver’s seat
see Seat Driving safety system ……………………….. 172
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ……….. 173 Active Brake Assist ………………………… 177 BAS (Brake Assist System) ………………. 174 Cameras ………………………………………. 172 EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion) …………………………………………….. 176 ESP Crosswind Assist …………………… 176 Off-road ABS …………………………………. 174 Overview ………………………………………. 173 Radar and ultrasonic sensors ………….. 172 Responsibility ……………………………….. 172 STEER CONTROL ……………………………. 176
Driving system Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment …………………………………… 198
Driving system see 360 Camera see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see DSR see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Start-off assist see Traffic Sign Assist
Driving tips Drinking and driving ……………………….. 147
422 Index
General driving tips ………………………… 147 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ….. 146
Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST
DSR ………………………………………………….. 183 Activating/deactivating ………………….. 184 Changing the target speed ……………… 184 Function ………………………………………. 183 Notes …………………………………………… 184
Dynamic handling control system see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
DYNAMIC SELECT ……………………………… 154 Configuring drive program I …………….. 156 Displaying engine data …………………… 156 Displaying vehicle data …………………… 156 Drive program display …………………….. 155 Drive programs ……………………………… 154 Function ………………………………………. 154 Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) ……………………………………………………. 155 Selecting the drive program ……………. 155
DYNAMIC SELECT switch Damping adjustment ……………………… 198
E E10 …………………………………………………… 342 Easy entry feature
Function/notes …………………………….. 102 Setting …………………………………………. 103
Easy exit feature Function/notes …………………………….. 102 Setting …………………………………………. 103
EBD (electronic brake force distribu tion)
Function/notes ……………………………… 176 ECO display
Function ………………………………………. 154 ECO start/stop function ……………………. 152
Automatic engine start …………………… 152 Automatic engine stop ……………………. 152 Method of operation ………………………. 152 Switching off/on …………………………… 153
Electric parking brake ……………………….. 168 Applying automatically …………………… 168 Applying or releasing manually ………… 170 Emergency braking ………………………… 170 Releasing automatically ………………….. 169
Electronic Stability Program see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided) ………………….. 285 Overview of the help functions ………….. 18 Reflective safety vest …………………….. 284 Removing the warning triangle ………… 284 Setting up the warning triangle ……….. 285
Emergency braking …………………………… 170 Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call system
see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start …………………….. 301 Emergency key
Locking a door ………………………………… 71 Unlocking a door …………………………….. 71
Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle ……………………….. 144
Emergency spare wheel ……………………. 334 Inflating ……………………………………….. 335 Notes ………………………………………….. 334
Index 423
Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ………………………………………. 36
Engine ECO start/stop function …………………. 152 Engine number ……………………………… 339 Starting (emergency operation mode) ………………………………………….. 144 Starting (Remote Online) ………………… 146 Starting (start/stop button) ……………. 144 Starting assistance ………………………… 295 Switching off (start/stop button) …….. 164
Engine data Displaying …………………………………….. 156
Engine number …………………………………. 339 Engine oil ………………………………………….. 274
Additives ……………………………………… 343 Capacity ………………………………………. 344 Checking the oil level using the on- board computer …………………………….. 273 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval …………… 344 Quality …………………………………………. 344 Topping up ……………………………………. 274
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
ESP Crosswind Assist …………………………… 176
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ……. 174 Activating/deactivating ………………….. 176 Function/notes ……………………………… 174
Exterior lighting see Lights
Exterior lighting (Care) ……………………… 280 Exterior mirrors …………………………. 135, 136
Anti-glare mode (automatic) ……………. 136 Automatic mirror folding function …….. 138 Folding in/out ………………………………. 135 Operating the memory function ………. 103 Parking position …………………………….. 137 Setting …………………………………………. 135
F Fatigue detection
see ATTENTION ASSIST First-aid kit (soft sided) …………………….. 285 Flat tire …………………………………………….. 285
Changing a wheel ………………………….. 329 MOExtended tires ………………………….. 286
Notes ………………………………………….. 285 TIREFIT kit ……………………………………. 287
Flat towing see Tow-bar system
Floor mats ………………………………………… 124 Foil covering
Radar and ultrasonic sensors ………….. 172 Free software …………………………………….. 33 Frequencies
Mobile phone ……………………………….. 338 Two-way radio ……………………………….. 338
Front airbag (driver, front passenger) …… 41 Front passenger seat
see Seat Fuel ………………………………………………….. 343
Additives ……………………………………… 343 E10 ……………………………………………… 342 Fuel reserve …………………………………. 343 Gasoline ………………………………………. 342 Quality (gasoline) ………………………….. 342 Refueling ……………………………………… 162 Sulfur content ………………………………. 342 Tank content ………………………………… 343
424 Index
Function seat see Door control panel
Fuses ……………………………………………….. 301 Before replacing a fuse …………………… 301 Fuse assignment diagram ……………….. 301 Fuse box in the cargo compartment …. 304 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 302 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot well ……………………………………………… 303 Notes …………………………………………… 301
Fuses see Fuses
G Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ……………………… 168 Opening or closing the door ……………. 168 Programming buttons …………………….. 166 Resolving problems ……………………….. 167 Synchronizing the rolling code …………. 167
Gasoline …………………………………………… 342 Gasoline station prices ……………………… 247 Gearshift recommendation ……………….. 160
Genuine parts …………………………………….. 22 Glide mode ……………………………………….. 161
H Handbrake
see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual) ……. 305 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ………………………….. 76 Hazard warning lights ……………………….. 127 Hazardous substances
Information …………………………………….. 25 Head restraint
Front (adjusting mechanically) …………… 97 Rear (installing/removing) ………………… 98 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting) ……………………………………… 98
Head-up Display ……………………………….. 228 Adjusting display elements (on-board computer) …………………………………….. 228 Adjusting the brightness (on-board computer) …………………………………….. 228 Function ………………………………………. 227 Menu (on-board computer) ……………… 228
Operating the memory function ………. 103 Setting the position (on-board com puter) ………………………………………….. 228 Switching on/off …………………………… 229
Headlamps see Automatic driving lights
Headliner (care) ………………………………… 281 High beam
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 126 High-beam flasher …………………………….. 126 High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ………………. 128 Hill start assist …………………………………. 196 HOLD function ………………………………….. 196
Function/notes …………………………….. 196 Switching on/off …………………………… 196
Home screen (media display) Overview ………………………………………. 231
Hood Opening/closing ……………………………. 271
Index 425
I Identification plate
Engine …………………………………………. 339 Refrigerant …………………………………… 346 Vehicle ………………………………………… 339
Ignition Switching on (Start/Stop button) …….. 143
Ignition key see SmartKey
Immobilizer ………………………………………… 85 Indicator lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps Individual drive program
Configuring …………………………………… 156 Selecting ……………………………………… 155
Inside rearview mirror see Exterior mirrors
Inspection see ASSYST PLUS
Instrument cluster Function/notes ……………………… 223, 224
Instrument Display Function/notes …………………………….. 224 Instrument cluster …………………………… 10 Warning/indicator lamps ……………….. 398
Instrument Display and on-board computer
Function/notes …………………………….. 223 Intelligent Light System
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ………………. 128 Cornering light ………………………………. 128
Interior lighting …………………………………. 130 Ambient lighting ……………………………. 130 Reading light …………………………………. 130 Setting …………………………………………. 130 Switch-off delay time ……………………… 131
Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating ……………………. 87 Function ………………………………………… 87
Internet radio see TuneIn
iPhone
see Smartphone integration
J Jack
Storage location ……………………………. 328 Jump-start connection ………………………. 295
General notes ……………………………….. 294
K KEYLESS-GO
Locking the vehicle ………………………….. 69 Problem …………………………………………. 70 Unlocking setting ……………………………. 66 Unlocking the vehicle ………………………. 69
Kickdown ………………………………………….. 161 Using ……………………………………………. 161
Knee airbag ………………………………………… 41
L Labeling (tires)
see Tire labeling Lamp
see Interior lighting Lamps (Instrument Display)
see Warning/indicator lamps
426 Index
Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist
Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur ing system
Installing ………………………………………… 55 Light switch
Overview ……………………………………… 125 Lighting
see Interior lighting see Lights
Lights ……………………………………………….. 125 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ………………. 128 Automatic driving lights ………………….. 126 Combination switch ……………………….. 126 Cornering light ………………………………. 128 Hazard warning lights …………………….. 127 High beam ……………………………………. 126 High-beam flasher …………………………. 126 Light switch ………………………………….. 125 Low-beam headlamps …………………….. 125 Parking lights ………………………………… 125 Rear fog lamp ……………………………….. 125
Responsibility for lighting systems ……. 125 Setting the exterior lighting switch- off delay time ……………………………….. 129 Standing lights ………………………………. 125 Switching the surround lighting on/off …………………………………………. 129 Turn signal light …………………………….. 126
Limited Warranty Vehicle ………………………………………….. 30
Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) …… 77 Live Traffic Information
Switching the traffic information dis play on …………………………………………. 247
Load index (tires) ……………………………… 320 Load-bearing capacity (tires) …………….. 320 Loading …………………………………………….. 117
Adjustable cargo compartment floor … 118 Bag hook ………………………………………. 117 Cargo tie-down rings ………………………. 117 Coat hook …………………………………….. 118 Definitions ……………………………………. 322 Notes …………………………………………… 104 Roof luggage rack ………………………….. 119
Loading guidelines ……………………………. 104 Loading information table …………………. 313 Loads
Securing ………………………………………. 104 Locking/unlocking
Activating/deactivating the auto matic locking feature ……………………….. 70 Emergency key ……………………………….. 71 KEYLESS-GO …………………………………… 69 Opening the tailgate ………………………… 72 Unlocking and opening doors from the inside ………………………………………. 68
Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off …………………………… 125
Lubricant additives see Additives
Luggage Securing ………………………………………. 104
Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way)
Lumbar support (4-way) ……………………… 93
Index 427
M Maintenance
Vehicle …………………………………………… 24 Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction
Restraint system …………………………….. 36 Malfunction message
see Display message Map ………………………………………………….. 246
Displaying online map contents ……….. 247 Displaying weather information ……….. 247 Moving …………………………………………. 246 Selecting the map orientation …………. 246 Setting the map scale …………………….. 246 Switching freeway information on/off …………………………………………. 246
Massage program Resetting the settings ………………………. 99
Massage programs Selecting the front seats ………………….. 99
Massage settings Resetting ……………………………………….. 99
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) …… 279 Maximum load rating ………………………… 319 Maximum permissible load
Calculation example ………………………. 315 Determining ………………………………….. 314
Maximum tire pressure ……………………… 319 MBUX Interior Assistant
Switching the reading light for the driver and front passenger on/off contact-free ………………………………….. 235 Switching the search light for the driver on/off ………………………………… 235
MBUX Interior Assistant (multimedia system) ……………………………………………. 234
Overview ……………………………………… 234 MBUX multimedia system …………………. 230
Activating/deactivating standby mode …………………………………………… 171 Configuring drive program I …………….. 156 Notes ………………………………………….. 230 Overview ……………………………………… 230 Setting route-based speed adapta tion ……………………………………………… 191 Standby mode function …………………… 171
Mechanical key Inserting/removing …………………………. 67 Unlocking the tailgate ………………………. 77
Media Overview of the functions and sym bols …………………………………………….. 262
Media mode Connecting Bluetooth audio equip ment ……………………………………………. 263
Medical aids ……………………………………….. 28 Memory function
Head-up Display Calling up stored settings ……………………………………….. 103 Head-up Display Storing settings ….. 103 Operating …………………………………….. 103 Outside mirrors Calling up stored settings ……………………………………….. 103 Outside mirrors Storing settings …… 103 Seat Calling up stored settings ……… 103 Seat Storing settings …………………… 103
Menu (on-board computer) Head-up Display ……………………………. 228 Overview ……………………………………… 225
428 Index
Mercedes me app Information …………………………………… 256
Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment …….. 255 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center …………………………………………. 254 Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection ……………………… 254 Concierge Service …………………………. 253 Information …………………………………… 253 Making a call via the overhead con trol panel ……………………………………… 253 Transferred data ……………………………. 255
Mercedes me connect Accident and breakdown manage ment ……………………………………………. 252 Information …………………………………… 251 Transferred data ……………………………. 253
Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys tem ………………………………………………….. 258
Automatic emergency call ………………. 259 Information …………………………………… 258 Information on data transfer ……………. 261 Manual emergency call …………………… 260
Overview ……………………………………… 259 Mercedes-Benz Link
see Smartphone integration
Message (multifunction display) see Display message
Message memory ……………………………… 350 Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone
Frequencies ………………………………….. 338 Transmission output (maximum) ……… 338 Wireless charging ………………………….. 123
Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Model series see Vehicle identification plate
MOExtended tires …………………………….. 286 Multifunction display
Overview of the displays …………………. 227 Multifunction steering wheel
Overview of buttons ………………………. 225
Multifunction steering wheel see Steering wheel
Multimedia system Activating/deactivating DSR …………… 184 Collision detection (parked vehicle) ….. 170
Multimedia system see Display (multimedia system) see MBUX Interior Assistant (multi media system) see MBUX multimedia system see Touchpad
N Navigation
Notes …………………………………………… 241 Overview ……………………………………… 243 Showing/hiding the menu ………………. 242 Switching on …………………………………. 242
Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route
Neutral Inserting ………………………………………. 158
Index 429
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ……. 146
O Occupant safety
see Airbag see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection) see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt
Off-road driving ………………………………… 150 Off-road driving
see Off-road driving Oil
see Engine oil On-board computer …………………………… 225
Displaying the service due date ……….. 270 Head-up Display menu …………………… 228
Multifunction display ……………………… 227 Operating …………………………………….. 225 Overview of menus ………………………… 225
On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection
Online services Data storage …………………………………… 32
Open-source software ………………………… 33 Opening the tailgate using your foot
HANDS-FREE ACCESS ……………………… 76 Operating fluids
Additives (fuel) ……………………………… 343 Brake fluid ……………………………………. 344 Coolant (engine) ……………………………. 344 Engine oil …………………………………….. 343 Fuel (gasoline) ………………………………. 342 Notes ………………………………………….. 340 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) … 346 Windshield washer fluid …………………. 345
Operating safety Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components) ……………………….. 26 Information …………………………………….. 25
Operating system see On-board computer
Operator’s Manual Vehicle equipment …………………………… 23
Operator’s Manual (digital) …………………. 20 Overhead control panel
Overview ………………………………………… 14
P Paint code ………………………………………… 339 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ……… 279 Panic alarm ………………………………………… 66
Activating/deactivating ……………………. 66 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
see Sliding sunroof Park position
Inserting ………………………………………. 158 Selecting automatically ………………….. 158
Parking see Electric parking brake
430 Index
Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ………………. 198 Activating …………………………………….. 202 Adjusting warning tones …………………. 202 Function ………………………………………. 198 Side impact protection …………………… 200 Switching off ………………………………… 202 System limitations …………………………. 198
Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist
Parking brake see Electric parking brake
Parking for an extended period ………….. 171 Parking lights ……………………………………. 125 Parking position
Exterior mirrors …………………………….. 137 Storing the position of the front- passenger outside mirror using reverse gear ………………………………….. 137
Partitioning net Attaching ……………………………………… 115
PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff
Payload Calculation example ………………………. 315 Determining the maximum ………………. 314
Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode …………………………………………… 171 Standby mode function …………………… 171
Permitted towing methods ………………… 297 Pets in the vehicle ………………………………. 63 Plastic trim (Care) …………………………….. 281 Post-collision brake …………………………….. 49 Power supply
Switching on (Start/Stop button) …….. 143 Power washer (care) …………………………. 278 Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant protection) …………………………………………. 48
Function ………………………………………… 48
PRE-SAFE Sound …………………………… 48 Reversing measures ………………………… 49
PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory occu pant protection plus) ………………………….. 49
Function ………………………………………… 49 Reversing measures ………………………… 49
Preventative occupant protection sys tem
see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu pant protection)
Profile ………………………………………………. 236 Creating a new profile ……………………. 237 Notes ………………………………………….. 236 Selecting profile options …………………. 237
Programs see DYNAMIC SELECT
Protecting the environment Notes …………………………………………….. 22
Protection against collision ……………….. 212
Q QR code
Rescue card …………………………………… 30
Index 431
Qualified specialist workshop ……………… 27
R Radar and ultrasonic sensors
Damage ……………………………………….. 172 Radio
Overview of the functions and sym bols …………………………………………….. 264
Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof ……………………………….. 84
Reading light Switching on/off with hand move ments ………………………………………….. 235
Reading light see Interior lighting
Real wood (Care) ………………………………. 281 Rear doors (child safety lock) ……………… 62 Rear fog lamp
Switching on/off …………………………… 126 Rear seat
see Seat see Third row of seats
Rear view camera ……………………………… 203 Care ……………………………………………. 280 Function ………………………………………. 203 Opening the camera cover (360 Camera) ………………………………………. 208
Rear window Changing the wiper blade ……………….. 134
Rear window wipers Activating/deactivating ………………….. 132
Reflective safety vest ……………………….. 284 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)
Notes ………………………………………….. 346 Refueling
Refueling the vehicle ……………………… 162 Remote Online
Charging the starter battery ……………. 145 Cooling or heating the vehicle inte rior ………………………………………………. 145 Starting the vehicle ……………………….. 146
Reporting safety defects …………………….. 29 Rescue card ……………………………………….. 30 Reserve
Fuel …………………………………………….. 343
Residual heat ……………………………………. 141 Restraint system ………………………………… 35
Basic instructions for children …………… 50 Function in an accident ……………………. 36 Functionality …………………………………… 35 Malfunction ……………………………………. 36 Protection ………………………………………. 35 Reduced protection …………………………. 35 Self-test …………………………………………. 35 Warning lamp …………………………………. 35
Reverse gear Inserting ………………………………………. 158
Rims (Care) ………………………………………. 280 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) ……….. 24 Roll away protection
see HOLD function Roller sunblind
Panorama roof with power tilt/slid ing panel ………………………………………… 81
Rollover crash …………………………………….. 28 Roof load ………………………………………….. 348 Roof load display
Information …………………………………… 155
432 Index
Roof luggage rack Loading ………………………………………… 119 Securing ……………………………………….. 119
Route ……………………………………………….. 245 Calculating …………………………………… 245 Selecting options …………………………… 245
Route guidance with augmented real ity
Activating …………………………………….. 245 Displaying street names and house numbers ………………………………………. 245
Route-based speed adaptation Function ………………………………………. 190 Setting …………………………………………. 191
Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires ………………………….. 286
S Safety systems
see Driving safety system Satellite radio
Logging in …………………………………….. 268 Setting music and sport alerts ………… 268
Search light Switching on/off with hand move ments ………………………………………….. 235
Seat ……………………………………………. 89, 107 4-way lumbar support ……………………… 93 Adjusting (electrically) ……………………… 93 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ………………….. 92 Adjusting the backrest (rear passenger compartment) …………………. 95 Adjusting the rear seat (mechanically) .. 93 Adjusting the seat backrest angle (rear passenger compartment) ………… 113 Adjustment (without Seat Comfort Package) ………………………………………… 90 Configuring the settings …………………… 99 Correct driver’s seat position ……………. 89 Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats …………………………… 112 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) back ……………………….. 109 Folding the backrest (rear passenger compartment) forwards to get in (third row of seats) ………………………….. 95 Folding the backrest (rear) forwards …. 107
Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards …………………………… 110 Operating the memory function ………. 103 Resetting the settings ………………………. 99 Setting options ……………………………….. 16
Seat belt …………………………………………….. 37 Fastening ……………………………………….. 39 Protection ………………………………………. 37
Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating ……………………. 41 Function ………………………………………… 40
Seat belt warning see Seat belts
Seat belts …………………………………………… 41 Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment …………………………………….. 41 Care …………………………………………….. 281 Reduced protection …………………………. 38 Releasing ……………………………………….. 40 Seat belt adjustment (function) …………. 40 Warning lamp ………………………………….. 41
Seat cover (Care) ………………………………. 281 Seat heating
Activating/deactivating ……………………. 99
Index 433
Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating ………………….. 100
Selecting a gear see Changing gears
Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever
Self-test Automatic front passenger front air bag shutoff …………………………………….. 46
Sensors (Care) ………………………………….. 280 Service center
see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display
see ASSYST PLUS Setting a speed
see Cruise control Setting the map scale
see Map Shift paddles
see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears
Gearshift recommendation ……………… 160
Side airbag …………………………………………. 41 Side impact protection ……………………… 200 Side windows ……………………………………… 78
Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment ………………….. 63 Closing ………………………………………….. 78 Closing using the SmartKey ………………. 80 Convenience closing feature …………….. 80 Convenience opening ………………………. 79 Opening …………………………………………. 78 Opening with the SmartKey ………………. 79 Problem …………………………………………. 80
Size designation (tires) ……………………… 320 Sliding sunroof ……………………………………. 81
Automatic features ………………………….. 84 Closing ………………………………………….. 81 Closing using the SmartKey ………………. 80 Opening …………………………………………. 81 Opening with the SmartKey ………………. 79 Problem …………………………………………. 84 Rain-closing feature …………………………. 84
SmartKey …………………………………………… 65 Acoustic locking verification signal ……. 66 Battery …………………………………………… 67
Energy consumption ………………………… 66 Features ………………………………………… 65 Key ring attachment ………………………… 67 Mechanical key ……………………………….. 67 Overview ……………………………………….. 65 Panic alarm ……………………………………. 66 Problem …………………………………………. 68 Unlocking setting ……………………………. 66
SmartKey functions Deactivating …………………………………… 66
Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone
Smartphone integration ………………….. 258 Overview ……………………………………… 258
Snow chains …………………………………….. 306 Socket (12 V) …………………………………….. 120
Front center console ……………………… 120 Socket (115 V) …………………………………… 120
Rear passenger compartment …………. 120 Software update
System updates …………………………….. 239
434 Index
Sound PRE-SAFE Sound …………………………… 48 Wheels and tires ……………………………. 305
Sound menu Functions overview ………………………… 269
Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel
Special seat belt retractor …………………… 55 Specialist workshop ……………………………. 27 Speed index (tires) ……………………………. 320 Sport Utility Vehicle ……………………………. 28 Standby mode
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 171 Function ……………………………………….. 171
Standing lights …………………………………. 125 Start-off assist ………………………………….. 197
Activating ……………………………………… 197 Function ………………………………………. 197
Start/Stop button Parking the vehicle ………………………… 164 Starting the vehicle ……………………….. 144
Switching on the power supply or ignition ………………………………………… 143
Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function
Starter battery Charging (Remote Online) ……………….. 145
Starting assistance see Jump-start connection
Starting the engine see Vehicle
Starting-off aid see Hill start assist
STEER CONTROL Function/notes ……………………………… 176
Steering wheel …………………………………. 225 Adjusting (manually) ………………………. 101 Buttons ………………………………………… 225 Steering wheel heater …………………….. 101
Steering wheel heater Switching on/off …………………………… 101
Steering wheel paddle shifters ………….. 159 Storage areas
see Storage compartment
Storage compartment ……………………….. 107 Armrest ……………………………………….. 107 Center console ……………………………… 107 Door ……………………………………………. 107 Glove box ……………………………………… 107
Storage compartments see Storage compartment
Storage spaces USB ports …………………………………….. 107
Stowage areas see Loading
Stowage compartments see Loading
Suggestions Configuring …………………………………… 237
Sulfur content ………………………………….. 342 Surround lighting
Switching on/off …………………………… 129 Surround View
see 360 Camera Surround view camera
Care ……………………………………………. 280
Index 435
Suspension Adaptive damping adjustment …………. 198 Damping characteristics …………………. 198
Switch-off delay time Exterior ………………………………………… 129 Interior …………………………………………. 131
Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul timedia system) …………………………….. 140 Switching on/off (control panel) ……… 140
System settings Overview of the system settings menu …………………………………………… 238
T Tailgate ………………………………………………. 72
Closing ………………………………………….. 73 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ……………………… 76 Limiting the opening angle ……………….. 77 Opening …………………………………………. 72 Opening dimensions ………………………. 347 Unlocking (mechanical key) ………………. 77
Tailpipes (Care) …………………………………. 280
Tank content Fuel …………………………………………….. 343 Reserve (fuel) ……………………………….. 343
Technical data Information …………………………………… 337 Vehicle identification plate ……………… 339
Telephone ………………………………….. 248, 250 Connecting a mobile phone (Pass key) ……………………………………………… 251 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing) ………………………………. 251 Functions in the telephone menu ……… 251 Notes …………………………………………… 248 Operating modes …………………………… 250 Telephone menu overview ………………. 250 Wireless charging (mobile phone) …….. 123
Telephony operating modes Bluetooth Telephony …………………….. 250
Temperature grade ……………………………. 317 Themes
Fastening ……………………………………… 237 Third row of seats ……………………………… 110
Folding back the backrest on the third row of seats …………………………… 112
Folding the backrest on the third row of seats forwards …………………………… 110 Getting in/out ………………………………… 95 Height limit …………………………………….. 90
Through-loading feature see Seat see Third row of seats
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ………… 318 Tire and Loading Information placard … 313 Tire characteristics …………………………… 320 Tire inflation compressor
see TIREFIT kit Tire information table ………………………… 313 Tire labeling ………………………………………. 317
Characteristics ……………………………… 320 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .. 318 Load index ……………………………………. 320 Load-bearing capacity ……………………. 320 Maximum tire load …………………………. 319 Maximum tire pressure …………………… 319 Overview ………………………………………. 317 Speed rating …………………………………. 320 Temperature grade …………………………. 317
436 Index
Tire Quality Grading ……………………….. 317 Tire size designation ………………………. 320 Traction grade ……………………………….. 317 Tread wear grade …………………………… 317
Tire load (maximum) …………………………. 319 Tire pressure …………………………….. 308, 309
Checking (manually) ………………………. 309 Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ………………………………………… 311 Maximum ……………………………………… 319 Notes ………………………………………….. 306 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ……………………………… 312 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system …………………………………….. 311 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ……………………………………… 312 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ……………………………………… 309 Tire pressure table ………………………… 308 TIREFIT kit ……………………………………. 287
Tire pressure loss warning system Function ……………………………………….. 312 Restarting …………………………………….. 312
Tire pressure monitor Function ………………………………………. 309 Restarting …………………………………….. 311
Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure ………………. 311 Checking the tire temperature …………. 311
Tire pressure table ……………………………. 308 Tire Quality Grading ………………………….. 317 Tire temperature
Checking (tire pressure monitoring system) ………………………………………… 311 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ……………………………………… 309
Tire tread …………………………………………. 305 Tire-change tool kit
Overview ……………………………………… 328 TIREFIT kit ………………………………………… 287
Storage location ……………………………. 287 Using …………………………………………… 287
Tires Changing hub caps ………………………… 329 Characteristics ……………………………… 320 Checking ……………………………………… 305
Checking the tire pressure (man ually) …………………………………………… 309 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system) …………………. 311 Definitions ……………………………………. 322 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .. 318 Flat tire ………………………………………… 285 Installing ………………………………………. 332 Load index ……………………………………. 320 Load-bearing capacity ……………………. 320 Maximum tire load …………………………. 319 Maximum tire pressure …………………… 319 MOExtended tires ………………………….. 286 Noise …………………………………………… 305 Notes on installing ………………………… 325 Overview of tire labeling …………………. 317 Removing ……………………………………… 331 Replacing ……………………………… 325, 329 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ……………………………… 312 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system …………………………………….. 311 Rotating ……………………………………….. 327 Selection ……………………………………… 325 Snow chains …………………………………. 306 Speed rating …………………………………. 320
Index 437
Storing ………………………………………… 328 Temperature grade …………………………. 317 Tire and Loading Information placard .. 313 Tire pressure (notes) ……………………… 306 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ……………………………………… 312 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ……………………………………… 309 Tire pressure table ………………………… 308 Tire Quality Grading ……………………….. 317 Tire size designation ………………………. 320 TIREFIT kit ……………………………………. 287 Traction grade ……………………………….. 317 Tread wear grade …………………………… 317 Unusual handling characteristics …….. 305
Tool see Vehicle tool kit
Top Tether ………………………………………….. 58 Touch Control
On-board computer ……………………….. 225 Operating …………………………………….. 232
Touchpad ………………………………………….. 232 Operating …………………………………….. 232
Touchscreen (media display) Operating …………………………………….. 232
Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating ……………………. 87 Function ………………………………………… 86
Tow-bar system ………………………………… 221 Tow-starting ……………………………………… 301 Towing away …………………………………….. 298 Towing eye
Installing ………………………………………. 300 Storage location ……………………………. 300
Towing methods ……………………………….. 297 Traction grade …………………………………… 317 Traffic information
Switching on the display …………………. 247 Traffic Sign Assist ……………………………… 215
Function/notes ……………………………… 215 Setting …………………………………………. 216 System limitations …………………………. 215
Transmission (problem) …………………….. 159 Transmission position display ……………. 157
Transporting Vehicle ………………………………………… 299
Tread wear grade ………………………………. 317 Trim element (Care) …………………………… 281 Trunk lid
see Tailgate TuneIn ………………………………………………. 267
Calling up …………………………………….. 267 Turn signal indicator …………………………. 126 Turn signal light
Activating/deactivating ………………….. 126 Two-way radios
Frequencies ………………………………….. 338 Notes on installation ……………………… 337 Transmission output (maximum) ……… 338
U Unlocking setting ……………………………….. 66 Updates
Important system updates ……………… 239 USB port …………………………………………… 121
438 Index
V Vehicle ……………………………………………… 144
Activating/deactivating standby mode …………………………………………… 171 Collision detection (parking) ……………. 170 Correct use ……………………………………. 28 Data acquisition ……………………………… 30 Data storage …………………………………… 30 Diagnostics connection ……………………. 27 Equipment ……………………………………… 23 Limited Warranty …………………………….. 30 Locking (automatically) ……………………. 70 Locking (from inside) ……………………….. 69 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) …………………….. 69 Locking/unlocking (emergency key) …… 71 Lowering ……………………………………… 333 Maintenance …………………………………… 24 Medical aids …………………………………… 28 Parking for an extended period ………… 171 Problem notification ………………………… 28 QR code rescue card ……………………….. 30 Qualified specialist workshop ……………. 27 Raising ………………………………………… 329 Standby mode function …………………… 171
Starting (emergency operation mode) ………………………………………….. 144 Starting (Remote Online) ………………… 146 Starting (start/stop button) ……………. 144 Switching off (start/stop button) …….. 164 Towing …………………………………………. 221 Unlocking (from inside) ……………………. 69 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ………………….. 69 Ventilating (convenience opening) ……… 79
Vehicle data Angle of approach/departure …………. 348 Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ………… 156 Maximum gradient-climbing capabil ity ……………………………………………….. 348 Roof load ……………………………………… 348 Turning radius ……………………………….. 347 Vehicle height ……………………………….. 347 Vehicle length ……………………………….. 347 Vehicle width ………………………………… 347 Wheelbase ……………………………………. 347
Vehicle data storage Event data recorders ……………………….. 32 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect ……………………………………. 32
Vehicle dimensions …………………………… 347
Vehicle electronics Notes …………………………………………… 337 Two-way radios ……………………………… 337
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate ……………….. 339 Paint code ……………………………………. 339 VIN ……………………………………………… 339
Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online) ….. 145
Vehicle key see SmartKey
Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS
Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada ………………. 24
Vehicle tool kit ………………………………….. 287 TIREFIT kit ……………………………………. 287 Towing eye …………………………………… 300
Vehicle with a high center of gravity ……. 28 Ventilating
Convenience opening ………………………. 79
Index 439
Vents see Air vents
VIN …………………………………………………… 339 Engine compartment ……………………… 339 Identification plate ………………………… 339 Windshield ……………………………………. 339
Vision Removing condensation from the windows ……………………………………….. 141
Voice Control System Function ………………………………………. 233 Starting ……………………………………….. 234
W Warning lamps
see Warning/indicator lamps Warning system
see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle
Removing …………………………………….. 284 Setting up …………………………………….. 285
Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp …………………. 407
J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) ……………………………….. 406 $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) .. 406 Coolant warning lamp ……………. 402 ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only) ………………… 405 F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only) …………………….. 405 Electric power steering warn ing lamp (red) ……………………………….. 401 # Electrical malfunction warning lamp ……………………………………………. 403 ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp .. 403
ESP OFF warning lamp …………. 409
ESP warning lamp flashes …….. 408
ESP warning lamp lights up …… 408 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes …………………………………………. 404 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up ………………………………………. 404
6 Restraint system warning lamp .. 400 7 Seat belt warning lamp flashes .. 400 7 Seat belt warning lamp lights up ……………………………………………….. 401 ! The electric parking brake (yel low) indicator lamp ………………………… 405 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp flashes ……………….. 410 h Tire pressure monitoring sys tem warning lamp lights up ……………… 410 L Warning lamp for distance warning function ……………………………. 407
Warning/indicator lamps ………………….. 398 Overview ……………………………………… 398 PASSENGER AIR BAG ………………………. 46
Warranty ……………………………………………. 30 Washer fluid
see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care) …………………….. 279 Water tank
see Air-water duct
440 Index
Weather information …………………………. 247 Web browser
Overview ……………………………………… 257 Wheel change
Lowering the vehicle ……………………… 333 Mounting a new wheel …………………… 332 Removing a wheel ………………………….. 331 Removing/installing hub caps …………. 329
Wheel rotation ………………………………….. 327 Wheels
Care ……………………………………………. 280 Changing hub caps ………………………… 329 Checking ……………………………………… 305 Checking the tire pressure (man ually) …………………………………………… 309 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres sure monitoring system) …………………. 311 Definitions ……………………………………. 322 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) .. 318 Flat tire ………………………………………… 285 Installing ………………………………………. 332 Load index ……………………………………. 320 Load-bearing capacity ……………………. 320 Maximum tire load …………………………. 319
Maximum tire pressure …………………… 319 MOExtended tires ………………………….. 286 Noise …………………………………………… 305 Notes on installing ………………………… 325 Overview of tire labeling …………………. 317 Removing ……………………………………… 331 Replacing ……………………………… 325, 329 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system ……………………………… 312 Restarting the tire pressure monitor ing system …………………………………….. 311 Rotating ……………………………………….. 327 Selection ……………………………………… 325 Snow chains …………………………………. 306 Speed rating …………………………………. 320 Storing ………………………………………… 328 Temperature grade …………………………. 317 Tire and Loading Information placard .. 313 Tire characteristics ………………………… 320 Tire pressure (notes) ……………………… 306 Tire pressure loss warning system (function) ……………………………………… 312 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ……………………………………… 309 Tire pressure table ………………………… 308 Tire Quality Grading ……………………….. 317
Tire size designation ………………………. 320 TIREFIT kit ……………………………………. 287 Traction grade ……………………………….. 317 Tread wear grade …………………………… 317 Unusual handling characteristics …….. 305
Wi-Fi Setting …………………………………………. 240
Widescreen Cockpit Instrument Dis play
Instrument cluster …………………………… 12 Window curtain airbag ………………………… 41 Windows
see Side windows Windows (Care) ………………………………… 280 Windshield ……………………………………….. 132
Replacing the wiper blades ……………… 132 Windshield
see Windshield Windshield washer fluid ……………………. 345
Notes ………………………………………….. 345 Windshield washer system
Topping up ……………………………………. 275
Index 441
Windshield wipers Activating/deactivating ………………….. 131 Replacing the wiper blades ……………… 132
Winter operation Snow chains …………………………………. 306
Wiper blades Care ……………………………………………. 280 Replacing ……………………………………… 132
Wireless charging Function/notes …………………………….. 122 Mobile phone ………………………………… 123
Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity ….
What contains the 2022 GLB manual?
The Mercedes-Benz GLB owner’s manual is a comprehensive guide provided by
Mercedes-Benz to assist owners in understanding and operating their specific model of the
Mercedes-Benz GLB.
It contains important information about the vehicle’s features, functions, and maintenance requirements.
A general overview of what you might find in
a Mercedes-Benz GLB 2022 owner’s manual:
- Warranty Information, about the vehicle’s warranty coverage
- Maintenance for your Mercedes-Benz GLB, such as oil changes, tire rotations,
brake inspections, and fluid checks - Basic operations, like starting and stopping the engine and driver settings
- Best practice for driving your Mercedes-Benz GLB
- Fuel Information, with recommended fuel type and fuel tank capacity
- Do-it-Yourself (DIY) Maintenance, for basic maintenance tasks that Mercedes-Benz GLB owners can do
Where to download the 2022 GLB Mercedes-Benz Owner’s
Manual?
The Mercedes-Benz owner manual for the 2022
model year is to be found on this page.
Is the manual for the Mercedes-Benz GLB free?
Yes, the owner’s manuals for the Mercedes-Benz GLB are free,
but the repair manuals are usually not easy to get and may cost.
What is a Mercedes-Benz GLB repair manual?
A Mercedes-Benz GLB repair manual for the model 2022 is a
comprehensive guide that provides in-depth vehicle repairs and maintenance information,
unlike the owner’s manual, which focuses on general operation and maintenance.
The Mercedes-Benz GLB (2022)
owner’s manual is available in English?
Yes, the owner’s manual for the model year 2022 is available in English.
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner’s Man-
ual describes all models as well as all the stand-
ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Coun-
try-specific differences in the language variants
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
fitted with all features described. This is also the
case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner’s
Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle
model years. The online version is the current
valid Owner’s Manual version. Possible variations
to your vehicle may not be taken into account as
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles
and equipment to the state of the art and introdu-
ces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner’s Manual, any
supplementary documents and the digital Own-
er’s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics,
are subject to Copyright and other laws for the
protection of intellectual property. They may not
be copied for commercial purposes or for trans—
mission, nor changed and used on other websites.
Инструкции по эксплуатации
Узнайте больше о своём Mercedes-Benz в интерактивной форме! Вы сможете ознакомиться с техническими и эксплуатационными особенностями автомобилей Mercedes-Benz. В этом вам поможет интерактивное руководство по эксплуатации, где информация представлена в наглядной и увлекательной форме. Перейдите по ссылке к интерактивному руководству по эксплуатации
Вы можете легко ознакомиться с техническими и эксплуатационными особенностями автомобилей Mercedes-Benz. В этом вам поможет интерактивное руководство по эксплуатации, где информация представлена в наглядной и увлекательной форме.
ВАЖНАЯ ИНФОРМАЦИЯ
Межсервисный интервал для новых автомобилей марки Mercedes-Benz
• Для легковых автомобилей Mercedes-Benz межсервисный интервал составляет 15 000 км или 1 год, в зависимости от того, что наступит раньше.
• Для автомобиля V-Класса межсервисный интервал определяется системой ASSYST или 1 год, в зависимости от того, что наступит раньше.
В зависимости от комплектации автомобиля компьютер сервисной системы может индицировать следующий актуальный срок ТО раньше, чем указано выше. Дальнейшую информацию Вы получите в специализированной мастерской с квалифицированным персоналом, например, в пункте ТО Mercedes-Benz.
Межсервисный интервал для автомобилей марки Mercedes-Benz, снятых с производства
• Для легковых автомобилей Mercedes-Benz с дизельными двигателями межсервисный интервал составляет 10 000 км или 1 год, в зависимости от того, что наступит раньше.
• Для легковых автомобилей Mercedes-Benz с бензиновыми двигателями межсервисный интервал составляет 15 000 км или 1 год, в зависимости от того, что наступит раньше.
• Для автомобиля V-Класса межсервисный интервал определяется системой ASSYST или 1 год, в зависимости от того, что наступит раньше.
Новые модели
Модели, снятые с производства